Emerson Vission Service manual

Vission 20/20 micro-controller
Operation and service manual • Version 2.01
Standard Vilter Warranty Statement
Seller warrants the products it manufactures to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment from Seller’s manufacturing plant or twelve (12) months from date of
installation at the initial end users location, whichever occurs first. In addition, Seller provides the following extended
warranties: (a) three (3) years from the date of shipment on single screw compressor internal rotating parts, (b) two
(2) years from the date of shipment on reciprocating compressors and single screw and reciprocating compressor
parts, and (c) two (2) years on all other parts on a single screw compressor unit. Such warranties do not apply to
ordinary wear and tear. Seller does not warrant that the product complies with any particular law or regulation not explicitly set forth in the specifications, and Buyer is responsible for ensuring that the product contains all features necessary to safely perform in Buyer’s and its customer’s plants and operations. Buyer must notify Seller of any warranty
claim within ten (10) days after such claim arises, otherwise Buyer waives all rights to such claim. Products supplied
by Seller, which are manufactured by others, are not warranted by Seller, but rather Seller merely passes through the
manufacturer’s warranty to Buyer.
SELLER EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Unless otherwise agreed in writing, Buyer’s sole remedy for breach of warranty is, at Seller’s option, the re-pair of the
defect, the correction of the service, or the providing a replacement part FOB Seller’s office. Seller will not be responsible for costs of dismantling, lost refrigerant, reassembling, or transporting the product. Further, Seller will not be
liable for any other direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special damages arising out of a breach of warranty.
THESE WARRANTY REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ALL OTHER WARRANTY REMEDIES ARE EXCLUDED. Products or
parts for which a warranty claim is made are to be returned transportation prepaid to Seller’s factory. Any improper
use, corrosion, neglect, accident, operation beyond rated capacity, substitution of parts not approved by Seller, or
any alteration or repair by others which, in Seller’s judgement, adversely affects the Product, shall void all warranties
and warranty obligations. Further, Seller shall not be liable under the above warranties should Buyer be in default of its
payment obligations to Seller under this Agreement or any credit agreement.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
i
Important Message
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE OPERATING YOUR COMPRESSOR.
The following instructions have been prepared to assist in operation of Vilter Vission 20/20 micro-controllers.
The entire manual should be reviewed before attempting to operate.
Vilter micro-controllers are thoroughly inspected at the factory. However, damage can occur in shipment.
For this reason, the equipment should be thoroughly inspected upon arrival. Any damage noted should be
reported immediately to the Transportation Company. This way, an authorized agent can examine the unit,
determine the extent of damage and take necessary steps to rectify the claim with no serious or costly delays.
At the same time, the local Vilter representative or the home office should be notified of any claim made.
All inquires should include the Vilter sales order number, compressor serial and model number. These can be
found on the compressor nameplate on the compressor.
All requests for information, services or parts should be directed to:
Vilter Manufacturing LLC
Customer Service Department
P.O. Box 8904
5555 South Packard Ave
Cudahy, WI 53110-8904 USA
Telephone: 1-414-744-0111
Fax:1-414-744-3483
E-mail: info.vilter@emerson.com
Equipment Identification Numbers:
Vilter Order Number:
Vilter Order Number:
Vilter Order Number:
Vilter Order Number:
_______________________Software Version: _________________
_______________________Software Version: _________________
_______________________Software Version: _________________
_______________________Software Version: _________________
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
ii
Table of Contents
Section Title
Section Number
Standard Vilter Warranty Statement ...................................................................................................... i
Important Message................................................................................................................................ ii
How To Use This Manual......................................................................................................................... TOC-8
Section 1 • Operational Flow Charts
Requirements to Start Compressor ........................................................................................................ 1-1
Critical Compressor Run Logic at Compressor Start ................................................................................ 1-1
Compressor Amperage Load Limiting .................................................................................................... 1-1
High Discharge Pressure Load Limiting .................................................................................................. 1-1
Suction Pressure Override Load Limit During Temperature Control ........................................................ 1-2
Section 2 • Installation Recommendations
Proper Wiring Sizing .............................................................................................................................. 2-1
Voltage Source ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Grounding ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Mixing Voltages ..................................................................................................................................... 2-2
DC signals .............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Wiring Methods ..................................................................................................................................... 2-3
Best Practices......................................................................................................................................... 2-4
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Digital Input/Output (I/O) ...................................................................................................................... 3-2
Analog Inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 3-4
Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Digital & Analog I/O Boards Layout......................................................................................................... 3-7
Digital Output Boards ............................................................................................................................ 3-8
Digital Input Boards ............................................................................................................................... 3-9
Digital In-Out Boards ............................................................................................................................. 3-10
Analog Input Boards .............................................................................................................................. 3-11
Analog Input Jumper Tables ................................................................................................................... 3-12
Analog Output Boards ........................................................................................................................... 3-14
Section 4 • Main Screen
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Top Status Bar ........................................................................................................................................ 4-2
Parameter Bar ........................................................................................................................................ 4-3
Bottom Status Bar .................................................................................................................................. 4-5
Splash Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Section 5 • Menu Screen
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Navigation Buttons ................................................................................................................................ 5-1
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Suction Pressure Control and Process Temperature Control ................................................................... 6-1
Auto-Cycle ............................................................................................................................................. 6-2
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) .............................................................................................................. 6-5
Rapid Cycling VFD Control ...................................................................................................................... 6-7
Pumpdown Control................................................................................................................................ 6-8
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
TOC - 1
Table of Contents
Section Title
Section Number
Pulldown Control ................................................................................................................................... 6-8
Control Mode......................................................................................................................................... 6-11
Stop load & Force unload ....................................................................................................................... 6-11
Capacity Slide Triggered Outputs ........................................................................................................... 6-12
Volume Slide Position Offset .................................................................................................................. 6-13
Soft Load ............................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Load Anticipating ................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Oil Control ............................................................................................................................................. 6-13
Liquid Injection ...................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Section 7 • Alarms and Trips
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Alarms and Trips Setpoints ..................................................................................................................... 7-1
Compressor Inhibits ............................................................................................................................... 7-5
Safety Failure Messages ......................................................................................................................... 7-5
Compressor Warnings............................................................................................................................ 7-6
Section 8 • Timers
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Timer Setpoints ..................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Section 9 • Compressor Scheduling
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 9-1
Scheduling Setpoint............................................................................................................................... 9-1
Section 10 • Compressor Sequencing
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 10-1
Pressure / Temperature Control Setpoints .............................................................................................. 10-1
Capacity Load/Unload Timers ................................................................................................................ 10-2
Compressor Sequencing Table ............................................................................................................... 10-3
Configuration Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-5
Compressor Setup for Slave Compressor Sequencing ................................................................. 10-5
Compressor Setup for Master Compressor Sequencing .............................................................. 10-7
Section 11 • Condenser Control
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 11-1
Condenser Control Setpoint ................................................................................................................... 11-1
Step Control........................................................................................................................................... 11-2
VFD Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 11-3
Section 12 • Service Options
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 12-1
Digital Outputs ...................................................................................................................................... 12-1
Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 12-5
Section 13 • Instruments Calibration
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 13-1
Pressure and Temperature Inputs ........................................................................................................... 13-1
Motor Current ........................................................................................................................................ 13-2
Remote Capacity ................................................................................................................................... 13-4
Analog Inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 13-4
Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 13-5
TOC - 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Table of Contents
Section Title
Section Number
Section 14 • Slide Calibration
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 14-1
Capacity Slide Valve Potentiometer ........................................................................................................ 14-1
Volume Slide Valve Potentiometer ......................................................................................................... 14-2
Slide Valve Operation ............................................................................................................................. 14-2
Calibrate Slide Valve Actuators............................................................................................................... 14-3
Command Shaft Rotation....................................................................................................................... 14-6
Slide Valve Troubleshooting Guide ......................................................................................................... 14-7
Slide Valve Actuator Troubleshooting Guide Blink Code ......................................................................... 14-9
Section 15 • Trend Chart
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 15-1
Chart Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 15-1
Trend Data Storage ................................................................................................................................ 15-2
Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 15-3
Section 16 • Event List
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 16-1
Event list Columns.................................................................................................................................. 16-1
Section 17 • Input / Output
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 17-1
Section 18 • Auxiliary Input / Output
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 18-1
Digital Inputs ......................................................................................................................................... 18-1
Digital Outputs ...................................................................................................................................... 18-2
Analog Inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 18-2
Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 18-4
Control .................................................................................................................................................. 18-4
Section 19 • Configuration
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 19-1
Units .................................................................................................................................................. 19-1
Time & Date ........................................................................................................................................... 19-2
Communications ................................................................................................................................... 19-2
Touchscreen .......................................................................................................................................... 19-2
Anti-Recycle........................................................................................................................................... 19-3
Restart On Power Failure ........................................................................................................................ 19-3
Compressor Sequencing ........................................................................................................................ 19-3
Language ............................................................................................................................................... 19-3
Model & Refrigerant ............................................................................................................................... 19-3
Compressor Control ............................................................................................................................... 19-4
Optional Function Selection ................................................................................................................... 19-4
Vilter Only Settings ................................................................................................................................ 19-5
Condenser Control ................................................................................................................................. 19-5
Oil Pump ................................................................................................................................................ 19-5
Oil Cooling ............................................................................................................................................. 19-5
Motor Current Device ............................................................................................................................ 19-6
Digital Inputs ......................................................................................................................................... 19-7
Analog Inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 19-8
Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 19-9
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
TOC - 3
Table of Contents
Section Title
Section Number
Digital Outputs ...................................................................................................................................... 19-9
I/O Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 19-10
Section 20 • Data Backup
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 20-1
Save / Load............................................................................................................................................. 20-1
Migrate .................................................................................................................................................. 20-3
Factory Reset ......................................................................................................................................... 20-3
Setpoints Report .................................................................................................................................... 20-4
Section 21 • Maintenance
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 21-1
Checklist ................................................................................................................................................ 21-1
Notes .................................................................................................................................................. 21-2
Log
.................................................................................................................................................. 21-2
Chart .................................................................................................................................................. 21-2
Section 22 • User Access
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 22-1
Apply .................................................................................................................................................. 22-1
Login .................................................................................................................................................. 22-2
Manage Accounts .................................................................................................................................. 22-2
VNC Account ......................................................................................................................................... 22-4
Screen Security Levels ............................................................................................................................ 22-4
Section 23 • Help Screen
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 23-1
Screen Features ..................................................................................................................................... 23-1
Section 24 • Twin Screw Control
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 24-1
Setup - Configuration Screen ................................................................................................................. 24-1
Operation .............................................................................................................................................. 24-2
Slide Calibration - Capacity Slide Valve Potentiometer ............................................................................ 24-2
Twin Screw Oil Pressure ......................................................................................................................... 24-4
Oil Pressure Monitoring BEFORE Compressor Starts ................................................................... 24-4
Low Oil Pressure Safety Bypass................................................................................................... 24-4
Oil Pressure Monitoring AFTER Compressor Starts ..................................................................... 24-5
Section 25 • Cool Compression Control
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 25-1
Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 25-1
Control Functions .................................................................................................................................. 25-2
Operational Differences from Single Screw ............................................................................................ 25-4
Section 26 • Remote Oil Cooler
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 26-1
Remote Oil Cooler Setpoint .................................................................................................................... 26-1
Step Control........................................................................................................................................... 26-2
VFD Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 26-2
TOC - 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Table of Contents / List of Tables and Figures
Section Title
Section Number
Appendix A • Vission 20/20 Troubleshooting Guide
Vission 20/20 Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................................................... A-1
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Vission 20/20 Application Procedures .................................................................................................... B-1
List of Tables and Figures
Table/Figure
Page Number
Table 3-1. Digital I/O .............................................................................................................................. 3-3
Table 3-2. Analog Inputs......................................................................................................................... 3-5
Table 3-3. Analog Outputs...................................................................................................................... 3-7
Table 3-4. Analog Input Jumper Tables ................................................................................................... 3-12
Table 10-1. Status Symbols .................................................................................................................... 10-4
Table 14-1. Command Shaft Rotation Required By Actuator ................................................................... 14-6
Table 14-2. Slide Valve Troubleshooting Guide ....................................................................................... 14-7
Table 14-3. LED Blink Codes and Troubleshooting Guide.........................................................................14-9
Table 22-1. Security Access Levels .......................................................................................................... 22-4
Figure 1-1. Operational Flow Charts ....................................................................................................... 1-1
Figure 2-1. Vission 20/20 with Individual Transformer ............................................................................ 2-1
Figure 2-2. EMI and Vission 20/20 .......................................................................................................... 2-1
Figure 2-3. Ground Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-4. Mixed Voltage Wiring ........................................................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-5. Correct Transformer Wiring Method .................................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-6. Incorrect Transformer Wiring Method .................................................................................. 2-3
Figure 3-1. Hardware Architecture Overview ......................................................................................... 3-1
Figure 3-2. Digital I/O Board Layout........................................................................................................ 3-7
Figure 3-3. Digital Output Board Layout ................................................................................................. 3-8
Figure 3-4. Digital Input Board Layout .................................................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-5. Digital Input-Output Board Layout........................................................................................ 3-10
Figure 3-6. Analog Input Board Layout ................................................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-7. Analog Output Board Layout ................................................................................................ 3-14
Figure 4-1. Main Screen.......................................................................................................................... 4-1
Figure 4-2. Top Status Bar ...................................................................................................................... 4-2
Figure 4-3. Parameter Bar ...................................................................................................................... 4-3
Figure 4-4. Unit Start Pop-Up Window ................................................................................................... 4-4
Figure 4-5. Bottom Status Bar ................................................................................................................ 4-5
Figure 4-6. Splash Screen ....................................................................................................................... 4-6
Figure 5-1. Menu Screen ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
Figure 5-2. Menu Screen with Remote Oil Cooler Enabled....................................................................... 5-2
Figure 6-1. Compressor Control Screen - Suction Pressure Control ......................................................... 6-1
Figure 6-2. Compressor Control Screen - Process Temperature Control .................................................. 6-2
Figure 6-3. Proportional Band & Setpoint ............................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-4. Compressor Control Screen - Discharge Pressure Control ..................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-5. Compressor Control Screen - VFD Settings Control ............................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-6. VFD One-Step Control Method ............................................................................................. 6-6
Figure 6-7. VFD Two-Step Control Method ............................................................................................. 6-6
Figure 6-8. Compressor Control Screen - Rapid Cycling VFD Control ....................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-9. Compressor Control Screen - Pumpdown/Pulldown Control ................................................ 6-9
Figure 6-10. Compressor Control Screen - Misc. 1 (Control Mode) .......................................................... 6-11
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
TOC - 5
List of Tables and Figures
Table/Figure
Page Number
Figure 6-11. Compressor Control Screen - Misc. 2 (Economizer & Hot Gas Bypass Control) ..................... 6-12
Figure 6-12. Compressor Control Screen - Oil Control & Liquid Injection Control .................................... 6-14
Figure 7-1. Alarms and Trips Screen - Page 1 ........................................................................................... 7-1
Figure 7-2. Alarms and Trips Screen - Page 1 as Level 2 User .................................................................... 7-2
Figure 7-3. Alarms and Trips Screen - Page 2 ........................................................................................... 7-3
Figure 7-4. Alarms and Trips Screen - Page 3 .......................................................................................... 7-4
Figure 8-1. Timers Screen - Page 1.......................................................................................................... 8-1
Figure 8-2. Timers Screen - Page 2.......................................................................................................... 8-3
Figure 9-1. Compressor Scheduling Screen ............................................................................................ 9-1
Figure 10-1. Compressor Sequencing Screen - Page 1 ............................................................................ 10-1
Figure 10-2. Compressor Sequencing Screen - Page 2 ............................................................................ 10-2
Figure 10-3. Compressor Sequencing Screen - Page 3 ............................................................................ 10-3
Figure 10-4. Compressor Setup for Slave Compressor Sequencing ......................................................... 10-5
Figure 10-5. Placing Slave Compressors in Remote Mode ....................................................................... 10-6
Figure 10-6. Compressor Setup for Master Compressor Sequencing ....................................................... 10-7
Figure 11-1. Condenser Control Screen - Page 1 ..................................................................................... 11-1
Figure 11-2. Condenser Control Screen - Page 2 ..................................................................................... 11-4
Figure 12-1. Service Options Screen - Digital Outputs (Page 1) ............................................................... 12-1
Figure 12-2. Service Options Screen - Digital Outputs (Page 2) ............................................................... 12-2
Figure 12-3. Service Options Screen - Digital Outputs (Page 3) ............................................................... 12-3
Figure 12-4. Service Options Screen - Digital Outputs for Remote Oil Cooler (Page 3) ............................. 12-4
Figure 12-5. Service Options Screen - Analog Outputs (Page 4) .............................................................. 12-5
Figure 13-1. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 1) ..................................................... 13-1
Figure 13-2. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 2) .................................................... 13-2
Figure 13-3. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 3) ..................................................... 13-3
Figure 13-4. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 4) ..................................................... 13-4
Figure 13-5. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 5) ..................................................... 13-5
Figure 13-6. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Outputs (Page 6) .................................................. 13-6
Figure 14-1. Slide Calibration Screen ...................................................................................................... 14-1
Figure 14-2. Actuator Assembly ............................................................................................................. 14-3
Figure 14-3. Menu Screen and Slide Calibration Button (Vission 20/20) .................................................. 14-4
Figure 14-4. Photo-chopper ................................................................................................................... 14-5
Figure 15-1. Trend Chart Screen ............................................................................................................. 15-1
Figure 15-2. Trend Setup Screen............................................................................................................. 15-3
Figure 16-1. Event List Screen................................................................................................................. 16-1
Figure 17-1. Input/Output Screen - Page 1 ............................................................................................. 17-1
Figure 17-2. Input/Output Screen - Page 2 ............................................................................................. 17-2
Figure 17-3. Input/Output Screen - Page 3 ............................................................................................. 17-2
Figure 17-4. Input/Output Screen - Page 4 ............................................................................................. 17-3
Figure 17-5. Input/Output Screen - Page 4 (Remote Oil Cooler Enabled) ................................................. 17-3
Figure 17-6. Input/Output Screen - Freeze Data Page ............................................................................. 17-4
Figure 18-1. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Digital Inputs (Page 1) ....................................................................... 18-1
Figure 18-2. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Digital Outputs (Page 2) .................................................................... 18-3
Figure 18-3. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 3) ...................................................................... 18-3
Figure 18-4. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 4) ...................................................................... 18-5
Figure 18-5. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 5) ...................................................................... 18-5
Figure 18-6. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Analog Outputs (Page 6) ...................................................................18-6
Figure 18-7. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Analog Outputs (Page 7) ...................................................................18-6
Figure 19-1. Configuration Screen - Initial Setup (Page 1) ....................................................................... 19-1
Figure 19-2. Configuration Screen - Compressor Control (Page 2) .......................................................... 19-4
Figure 19-3. Configuration Screen - Digital Auxiliaries (Page 3) .............................................................. 19-7
Figure 19-4. Configuration Screen - Analog Auxiliaries (Page 4) .............................................................. 19-8
Figure 19-5. Configuration Screen - Analog and Digital Outputs (Page 5) ............................................... 19-9
Figure 19-6. Configuration Screen - I/O Configuration (Page 6) .............................................................. 19-10
TOC - 6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
List of Tables and Figures
Table/Figure
Page Number
Figure 20-1. Data Backup Screen - Save/Load ......................................................................................... 20-1
Figure 20-2. Data Backup Screen - Migrate and Factory Reset ................................................................. 20-3
Figure 20-3. Data Backup Screen - Setpoints Report ............................................................................... 20-4
Figure 21-1. Maintenance Screen - Checklist .......................................................................................... 21-1
Figure 21-2. Maintenance Screen - Log ................................................................................................... 21-2
Figure 21-3. Maintenance Screen - Chart ................................................................................................ 21-3
Figure 22-1. User Access Screen - Login .................................................................................................. 22-1
Figure 22-2. User Access Screen - Manage Accounts ............................................................................... 22-2
Figure 22-3. User Access Screen - VNC Accounts..................................................................................... 22-3
Figure 23-1. Help Screen - Manual .......................................................................................................... 23-1
Figure 23-2. Help Screen - USB ............................................................................................................... 23-2
Figure 23-2. Version Pop-Up Screen ....................................................................................................... 23-2
Figure 24-1. Configuration Screen - Twin Screw Option .......................................................................... 24-1
Figure 24-2. Slide Calibration - Twin Screw Control................................................................................. 24-2
Figure 24-3. Slide Calibration - Twin Screw Bump Pop-Up Window ......................................................... 24-3
Figure 24-4. Prelub Oil Pressure and Run Oil Pressure Settings ............................................................... 24-4
Figure 24-5. Timers Menu - Twin Screw Control ..................................................................................... 24-5
Figure 25-1. Configuration Screen.......................................................................................................... 25-1
Figure 25-2. Compressor Control Screen - Cool Compression Control (Page 4) ....................................... 25-2
Figure 26-1. Remote Oil Cooler Screen (Page 1) ..................................................................................... 26-1
Figure 26-2. Remote Oil Cooler VFD Screen (Page 2) .............................................................................. 26-3
END OF TOC
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
TOC - 7
How to Use This Manual
NOTE
Manual revision should match software version.
This manual contains instructions for the Vission 20/20
Operation & Service Manual. It has been divided into 28
sections.
It is highly recommended that the manual be reviewed
prior to servicing the Vission 20/20 system parts.
Figures and tables are included to illustrate key concepts.
Safety precautions are shown throughout the manual.
They are defined as the following:
Section 1: Operational Flow Charts
WARNING - Warning statements are shown when there
are hazardous situations, if not avoided, will result in serious injury or death.
Section 2: Installation Recommendations
Section 3: Hardware Architecture
Section 4: Main Screen
Section 5: Menu Screen
CAUTION - Caution statements are shown when there
are potentially hazardous situations, if not avoided, will
result in damage to equipment.
Section 6: Compressor Control
Section 7: Alarms & Trips
Section 8: Timers
NOTE - Notes are shown when there are additional information pertaining to the instructions explained.
Section 9: Compressor Scheduling
Section 10: Compressor Sequencing
Section 11: Condenser Control
NOTICE - Notices are shown when there are important
information that can help avoid system failure.
Section 12: Service Options
Section 13: Instruments Calibration
Section 14: Slide Calibration
ADDITIONAL IMPORTANT NOTES
Section 15: Trend Chart
• Due to continuing changes and unit updates, always
refer to the www.Vilter.com to make sure you have
the latest manual.
Section 16: Event List
Section 17: Input/Output
• Any suggestions for manual improvements can be
made to Vilter Manufacturing at the contact information on page ii.
Section 18: Auxiliary Input/Output
Section 19: Configuration
Section 20: Data Backup
• For additional video information pertaining to the
Vission 20/20, refer to the Vilter video playlist at
www.YouTube.com/EmersonClimateTech
Section 21: Maintenance
Section 22: User Access
Section 23: Help Screen
Section 24: Twin Screw Control
Section 25: Cool Compression Control
Section 26: Remote Oil Cooler
Appendix A: Vission 20/20 Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix B: Application Procedures
TOC - 8
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 1 • Operational Flow Charts
Requirements to Start Compressor
Volume and
Capacity slides are
less than 5%
Oil Separator Temp
>Oil Sep Start Trip
Setpt
Filter Diff Press <
Start Filter Diff Trip
Setpt
Oil Pump On: Prelub Oil Press is > Prelub Oil
Press Reset Setpt for “Min Compressor Prelub Timer”
setting (typically 5 seconds)
Start Compressor
Critical Compressor Run Logic at Compressor Start
Start
Compressor
Is
Run Oil Press>
Prelub Oil Press
Reset setpt?
(Default 5 PSI)
Yes
“Oil Press
Bypass at Comp
Start” timer
expires (60 sec
after start)
Yes
Is
Run Oil Press>
Run Oil Press
Reset setpt?
(Default 40 PSI)
No
No
Run Oil Press Failure
Run Oil Press Failure
Yes
“Filter Diff Press Safety
Changeover” timer expires
(60 sec after start)
Is Filter Diff >
Hi Filter Diff Press Run
Trip Setpt
for 5 seconds
No
Oil Separator Temp
Safety Changeover
Timer expires (5 min
after start)
Is
Oil Sep Temp > Lo
Oil Sep Run Reset
setpt?
Yes
Lo Run Oil Sep Temp Failure
Run Filter Diff Press Failure
Is
Motor Amps >
FLA (ON)
Setpt?
Yes
Capacity Increase
Disabled
Run
No
Yes
Compressor Amperage Load Limiting
Yes
High Discharge Pressure Load Limiting
Is
Dsch Press >
Cutin (ON)
Setpt?
No
Yes
Capacity Increase
Disabled
Yes
Capacity Decrease until
Dsch Press < ON Setpt x
1.0625
No
Is
Motor Amps >
FLA (OFF)
Setpt?
Yes
No
Capacity Decrease
until Amps < FLA x
1.0625
Is
Dsch Press >
Cutout (OFF)
Setpt?
Normal Loading and
Unloading
No
Normal Loading and
Unloading
Figure 1-1. Operational Flow Charts (1 of 2)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
1 – 1
Section 1 • Operational Flow Charts
Suction Pressure Override Load Limit During Temperature Control
Is
Suction Press <
Suct Press Cap
Dec OFF
Setpt?
Yes
Capacity Increase
Disabled
Yes
Decrease compressor capacity until Suction
Press > Suction Press Cap Decrease ON setpoint.
No
Normal Loading and
Unloading
No
Is
Suction Press <
Suct Press Cap
Dec ON
Setpt?
Figure 1-1. Operational Flow Charts (2 of 2)
1 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 2 • Installation Recommendations
Proper Wiring Sizing
• Always size wire gauges as specified by the National
Electrical Code (NEC) for electronic control devices.
• For improved noise immunity, install one size larger
wire gauge than the NEC requirement to assure ample current-carrying capability.
• Never under size wire gauges.
Voltage Source
• Transformers
block
a
large
percentage
Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI). The Vilter
Vission 20/20 should be isolated with its own control transformer for the most reliable operation, see
Figure 2-1.
• Connecting the Vilter Vission 20/20 to breaker panels
and central control transformers exposes the Vission
20/20 to large amounts of EMI emitted from the
other devices connected to the secondary terminals
of the transformer. This practice should be avoided if
possible, see Figure 2-2.
of
Figure 2-1. Vission 20/20 with Individual Transformer
Figure 2-2. EMI and Vission 20/20
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
2 – 1
Section 2 • Installation Recommendations
Grounding
• Each voltage level must be run in separate conduit:
• Continuous grounds must be run from the utility ground to the Vission 20/20, see Figure 2-3.
Grounding.
• 460 VAC
• 120 VAC
• 230 VAC
• 24 VAC
• DC Signals
• Never use conduit grounds.
• If your installation site has wire-ways or conduit trays,
dividers must be installed between the different
voltages.
Mixing Voltages
DC signals
• Grounds must be copper or aluminum wire.
• Separate different voltages from each other and separate AC from DC, see Figure 2-4.
• If your installation site has wire-ways or conduit trays,
dividers must be installed between the different
voltages.
Figure 2-3. Ground Wiring
Figure 2-4. Mixed Voltage Wiring
2 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 2 • Installation Recommendations
Wiring Methods
• Each Vission 20/20 panel should have its own individual control transformer, see Figure 2-5 and Figure
2-6.
Figure 2-5. Correct Transformer Wiring Method
Figure 2-6. Incorrect Transformer Wiring Method
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
2 – 3
Section 2 • Installation Recommendations
Best Practices
• Do:
• Keep AC wires away from circuit boards.
• Always run conduit into the bottom or sides
of an enclosure.
• If the conduit must be placed in the top of an
enclosure, use a water-tight conduit fitting to
keep water from entering the enclosure.
• The Vission 20/20 is supplied with prepunched conduit holes. Use them!
• Don’t:
• Don’t run wires through the Vission 20/20
enclosure that are not related to the compressor control.
• Don’t add relays, timers, transformers, etc. in
the Vission 20/20 enclosure without first checking with Vilter.
• Don’t run conduit into the top of an enclosure.
• Don’t run refrigerant tubing inside the
enclosure.
• Don’t drill metal enclosures without taking
proper precautions to protect circuit boards
from damage.
2 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Overview
The Vission 20/20 control panel utilizes X-86 PC technology with a Linux operating system. For hardware architecture, see Figure 3-1.
The Vission 20/20 has the following attributes:
• Low power, Industrial rated X-86 CPU.
• 15” XGA, high resolution LCD display. (Outdoor viewable LCD optional).
• 8-wire touch screen operator interface.
• Flexible and expandable I/O.
• NEMA-4 enclosure (NEMA-4X optional).
• Industrial temperature range design.
Figure 3-1. Hardware Architecture Overview
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
3 – 1
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Digital Input/Output (I/O)
Trip Output:
Refer to Table 3-1.
• This output is energized when the system has no
Trips. If a trip is issued, the output de-energizes and
stays de-energized until the trip condition is cleared.
Compressor Start Output:
• When the Vission 20/20 signals the compressor to
start, this output is energized. When the Vission
20/20 signals the compressor to stop, this output is
de-energized.
Oil Pump Start Output:
• When the Vission 20/20 signals the oil pump to start,
this output is energized. When the Vission 20/20 signals the oil pump to stop, this output is de-energized.
Capacity Increase Output:
• This output is only active when the compressor is
running. When the Vission 20/20 determines that
the compressor should increase capacity by moving
the slide valve to a higher percentage, this output is
energized. Once the slide valve reaches 100%, this
output will not energize.
Capacity Decrease Output:
• This output is only active when the compressor is
running. When the Vission 20/20 determines that
the compressor should decrease capacity by moving
the slide valve to a lower percentage, this output is
energized. Once the slide valve reaches 0%, this output will not energize.
Volume Increase Output:
• This output is only active when the compressor is
running. When the Vission 20/20 determines that
the compressor should increase Volume Index (VI) by
moving the volume slide to a higher percentage, this
output is energized. Once the volume slide reaches
100%, this output will not energize.
Volume Decrease Output:
• This output is only active when the compressor is running. When the Vission 20/20 determines that the
compressor should decrease Volume Index (VI) by
moving the volume slide to a lower percentage, this
output is energized. Once the volume slide reaches
0%, this output will not energize.
Oil Sump Heater Output:
• This output is active and energized when the oil
separator temperature is lower than the oil separator
temperature setpoint. It is de-energized when the oil
separator temperature is higher than the oil separator temperature setpoint.
Slide Valve Setpoint #1 Output (Economizer Port #1):
• Normally used for an economizer solenoid, but could
be used for other devices. When the compressor slide
valve percentage is equal to or greater than “slide
valve set-point #1”, the output is energized. When
the compressor slide valve percentage is less than
“slide valve set-point #1”, the output is de-energized.
Slide Valve Setpoint #2 Output (Hot Gas Bypass):
• Normally used for a hot gas solenoid, but could be
used for other devices. When the compressor slide
valve percentage is equal to or greater than “slide
valve set-point #2”, the output is energized. When
the compressor slide valve percentage is less than
“slide valve set-point #2”, the output is de-energized.
Alarm Output:
• This output is energized when the system has no
alarms. If an alarm is issued, the output de-energizes
and stays de-energized until the alarm condition is
cleared.
Economizer Port #2 Output:
• This output is energized when the compressor slide
valve percentage is equal to or greater than slide
valve set-point for economizer port 2. It is de-energized when the compressor slide valve percentage is
less than slide valve set-point for economizer port 2.
Liquid Injection #1 Output:
• The function of this output will differ depending on
what type liquid injection is selected. If the liquid injection solenoid only is chosen, then the output will
energize when discharge temperature is above liquid
injection setpoint #1 and the oil separator temperature is above the oil separator temperature override
set-point. The output is de-energized when any one
of the above condition is not met.
• If the compressor has liquid injection with motorized value oil cooling, then this output is energized
when the compressor is running and the discharge
temperature is above the oil separator temperature
override set-point and the oil separator temperature
is above the override setpoint. The output is de-energized when the discharge temperature falls below
the “on” setpoint minus the solenoid differential or
when oil separator temperature is below the oil separator temperature override set-point.
Liquid Injection #2 Output:
• Not Defined
3 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Table 3-1. Digital I/O (1 of 2)
Description
Board
I/O #
1
1
Compressor Start
OUTPUT
1
2
Oil Pump Start
OUTPUT
1
3
Capacity Increase
OUTPUT
1
4
Capacity Decrease
OUTPUT
1
5
Volume Increase
OUTPUT
1
6
Volume Decrease
OUTPUT
1
7
Oil Separator Heater
OUTPUT
1
8
Trip indicator (ON=Normal)
OUTPUT
2
9
Slide Valve Set point #1 (Economizer Port #1)
OUTPUT
2
10
Slide Valve Set point #2 (Hot Gas Bypass)
OUTPUT
2
11
Alarm (ON=Normal)
OUTPUT
2
12
Economizer Port #2
OUTPUT
2
13
Liquid Injection #1
OUTPUT
2
14
Liquid Injection #2
OUTPUT
2
15
Remote Enabled
OUTPUT
2
16
Shunt Trip
OUTPUT
3
17
Comp Motor Starter Auxiliary Contact
INPUT
3
18
High Level Shutdown
INPUT
3
19
Oil Level Float Switch #1
INPUT
3
20
Oil Level Float Switch #2
INPUT
3
21
Remote Setpoint #1/#2 Selection
INPUT
3
22
Remote Start/Stop
INPUT
3
23
Remote Capacity Increase
INPUT
3
24
Remote Capacity Decrease
INPUT
4
25
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step #1
OUTPUT
4
26
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step #2
OUTPUT
4
27
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step #3
OUTPUT
4
28
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step #4
OUTPUT
4
29
Auxiliary Input #1
INPUT
4
30
Auxiliary Input #2
INPUT
4
31
Auxiliary Input #3
INPUT
4
32
Auxiliary Input #4
INPUT
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Type
3 – 3
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Remote Enabled Output:
• This output is energized when the Vission 20/20
panel is enabled for remote control. If the compressor parameter does not satisfy start conditions or is
placed into the manual stop position, this output is
de-energized.
Shunt Trip:
• This output is designed to be connected to a master
power breaker with a shunt trip input. If the Vission
20/20 detects the compressor motor is running when
it’s not suppose to be, then this output can be energized to trip the breaker supplying power to a starter.
Comp Motor Starter Auxiliary Contact:
• This input looks for a feedback signal from the compressor starter, confirming that the compressor
starter is energized.
High Level Shutdown Input:
• This input must be energized in order for the compressor to operate. If de-energized, the compressor
will shut down and issue a high level trip.
Oil Level Float Switch #1 Input:
• This input must be energized in order for the compressor to operate. If de-energized, the compressor
will shut down and issue a oil level #1 trip.
Oil Level Float Switch #2 Input:
• This input must be energized in order for the compressor to operate. If de-energized, the compressor
will shut down and issue a oil level #2 trip.
Remote Select #1/#2 Input:
• This input enables or disables remote I/O control.
Energizing this input enables the Remote Capacity
Increase and Remote Capacity Decrease inputs.
Remote Start/Stop Input:
• If the compressor is enabled for remote I/O control,
this input is enabled. Energizing this input will issue
a start for the compressor as long as it is available to
run. De-energizing this input stops the compressor.
Remote Capacity Increase Input:
• The slide valve will continuously increase as long as
this input is energized. The slide valve will not increase when this input is de-energized.
Remote Capacity Decrease Input:
• Operational only when the compressor is running.
This input is enabled if the compressor is enabled
for remote I/O control. Energizing this input will decrease the slide valve position. The slide valve will
continuously decrease as long as this input is energized. The slide valve will not decrease when this input is de-energized.
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step #1 Output:
• This output is enabled when condenser control or
Remote Oil Cooler option is selected. A condenser /
Remote Oil Cooler fan or pump will be turned on or
off by this output.
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step #2 Output:
• This output is enabled when condenser control or
Remote Oil Cooler option is selected. A condenser /
Remote Oil Cooler fan or pump will be turned on or
off by this output.
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step #3 Output:
• This output is enabled when condenser or Remote
Oil Cooler control option is selected. A condenser /
Remote Oil Cooler fan or pump will be turned on or
off by this output.
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step #4 Output:
• This output is enabled when condenser or Remote
Oil Cooler control option is selected. A condenser /
Remote Oil Cooler fan or pump will be turned on or
off by this output.
Auxiliary Inputs #1 - #8:
• Optional inputs that can be configured as an alarm
or trip. Typically connected to external switched
devices.
Auxiliary Outputs #1 - #4:
• Optional inputs that can be configured as an alarm
or trip. Typically connected to external switched
devices.
NOTE
The scan interval on the remote increase and
decrease inputs is approximately ONE SECOND.
Please take that into account when developing
a control scheme using the remote increase and
remote decrease inputs for compressor control.
• If the compressor is enabled for remote I/O control,
this input is enabled. Operational only when the compressor is running. Energizing this input will increase
the slide valve position.
3 – 4
Analog Inputs
Refer to Table 3-2.
Motor Current:
• Default is a 0-5 Amp current transformer (CT). Current
transformer ratio is set in the calibration screen.
Suction Pressure:
• Default signal is 4-20mA. Suction pressure transducer
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Table 3-1. Digital I/O (2 of 2)
Description
Board
I/O #
5
33
Auxiliary Output #1
OUTPUT
5
34
Auxiliary Output #2
OUTPUT
5
35
Auxiliary Output #3
OUTPUT
5
36
Auxiliary Output #4
OUTPUT
5
37
Auxiliary Input #5
INPUT
5
38
Auxiliary Input #6
INPUT
5
39
Auxiliary Input #7
INPUT
5
40
Auxiliary Input #8
INPUT
Table 3-2. Analog Inputs (1 of 2)
Description
Type
Board
I/O #
6
1
Motor Current
6
2
Suction Pressure
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA
6
3
Discharge Pressure
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA
6
4
Oil Filter Inlet Pressure
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA
6
5
Oil Manifold Pressure
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA
6
6
Economizer Pressure
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA
6
7
% Slide Valve Position
0-5V, 4-20 mA, Potentiometer
6
8
% Volume Position
0-5V, 4-20 mA, Potentiometer
7
9
Suction Temperature
4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
7
10
Discharge Temperature
4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
7
11
Oil Separator Temperature
4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
7
12
Oil Manifold Temperature
4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
7
13
Process Temperature
4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
7
14
Chiller Inlet Temperature
4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
7
15
Condenser Pressure
7
16
Remote Caphold Setpoint
8
17
Auxiliary #1
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
8
18
Auxiliary #2
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
8
19
Auxiliary #3
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
8
20
Auxiliary #4
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
8
21
Auxiliary #5
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
8
22
Auxiliary #6
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
8
23
Auxiliary #7
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
8
24
Auxiliary #8
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
9
25
Auxiliary #9
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
9
26
Auxiliary #10
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
9
27
Auxiliary #11
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Type
4-20 mA, 0-5A
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
0-5V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
3 – 5
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
range and calibration is set in the calibration screen.
Discharge Pressure
• Default signal is 4-20mA. Discharge pressure transducer range and calibration is set in the calibration
screen.
Oil Filter Inlet Pressure:
• Default signal is 4-20mA. Oil filter pressure transducer range and calibration is set in the calibration
screen.
Oil Manifold Pressure:
• Default signal is 4-20mA. Oil manifold pressure transducer range and calibration is set in the calibration
screen.
Condenser Pressure:
• Default signal is 4-20mA. Condenser pressure transducer range and calibration is set in the calibration
screen.
Remote Caphold:
• Default signal is 4-20mA. Active in “Direct I/O” mode.
Adjusts the capacity of the compressor from 0-100%,
proportional to the 4-20mA signal.
Auxiliary #1 - #16:
• Flexible analog inputs that can be configured to control, alarm or trip.
Analog Outputs:
Economizer Pressure:
Refer to Table 3-3.
• Default signal is 4-20mA. Economizer pressure transducer range and calibration is set in the calibration
screen.
Compressor VFD:
Slide Valve Position:
• Reads the 0-5 volt signal back from the slide position motor actuator to indicate current slide valve
position.
Volume Position:
• Reads the 0-5 volt signal back from the slide volume
motor actuator to indicate current volume position.
Suction Temperature:
• Default signal is RTD. Suction temperature calibration is set in the calibration screen.
Discharge Temperature:
• 4-20mA output to control compressor motor speed
with a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD).
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler VFD:
• 4-20mA output to control one condenser / remote oil
cooler fan which is interleaved between the remaining condenser / remote oil cooler steps for smoother
control.
% Slide Valve Position:
• 4-20mA signal that transmits the slide valve position
for remote monitoring.
Motorized Valve (V+):
• Default signal is RTD. Oil separator temperature calibration is set in the calibration screen.
• For a cool compression compressor, this 4-20mA
signal controls a motorized valve to regulate the liquid refrigerant level in the oil separator. For a liquid
injection application on a standard single screw, this
4-20mA signal controls a motorized valve to regulate
the liquid refrigerant injected into the compressor for
oil cooling purposes.
Oil Manifold Temperature:
Auxiliary Outputs #1 - #4:
• Default signal is RTD. Oil manifold temperature calibration is set in the calibration screen.
• Optional outputs that can be configured in user defined manner.
Process Temperature:
• When Oil Flow Control option is selected from configuration screen, Auxiliary Output #1 which is 4-20mA
signal is used to control the opening percentage of
Danfoss valve.
• Default signal is RTD. Discharge temperature calibration is set in the calibration screen.
Oil Separator Temperature:
• Default signal is 4-20mA. Process temperature calibration and range are set in the calibration screen.
Chiller Inlet Temperature:
• Default signal is 4-20mA. Measures separator level.
Chiller Inlet Temperature calibration and range are
set in the calibration screen.
3 – 6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Table 3-2. Analog Inputs (2 of 2)
Description
Board
I/O #
9
28
Auxiliary #12
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
9
29
Auxiliary #13
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
9
30
Auxiliary #14
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
9
31
Auxiliary #15
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
9
32
Auxiliary #16
0-5V, 1-5 V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA, RTD, ICTD
Table 3-3. Analog Outputs
Description
Type
Board
I/O #
Type
10
1
Compressor VFD
4-20 mA
10
2
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler VFD
4-20 mA
10
3
% Slide Valve Position
4-20 mA
10
4
Motorized Valve (Cool Compression or Liquid
Injection), V+
4-20 mA
10
5
Auxiliary Output #1
4-20 mA
10
6
Auxiliary Output #2
4-20 mA
10
7
Auxiliary Output #3
4-20 mA
10
8
Auxiliary Output #4
4-20 mA
Digital & Analog I/O Boards Layout
It is important to install the boards in the proper layout.
For the correct digital and analog input/output (I/O)
board layout, see Figure 3-2.
Dipswitches
• Each board has a dipswitch which sets its communications address so that it can communicate with the
CPU board. The dipswitch settings must be correct
or the I/O will not function.
Jumpers
• Jumpers are required on the analog boards to configure them for the type of sensors used. The jumper
table for the analog board shows the optional jumper configurations for sensors other than the default
Vilter standard. If a different sensor is to be used, the
jumpers on the analog board need to be changed. In
addition, the configuration for this sensor must be
changed in the Instrument Calibration screen. The
following illustrations show the Vilter default configurations for the Vission 20/20.
Figure 3-2. Digital I/O Board Layout
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
3 – 7
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Digital Output Boards
Voltage LEDs:
The digital output board convert signals generated by
the Vission 20/20 program into 120Vac signals that can
be energize or signal other devices. All the signals are
digital in that the only two states available or either on
or off. See board layout, Figure 3-3.
• Marked in the diagram below in Orange. These LEDs
indicate the correct voltage of both the 5Vdc and
24Vdc power sources.
Communication LEDs:
• Marked in the diagram below in Green. These LEDs
show the active communications between the digital
output board and the Vission 20/20 CPU board.
Signal LEDs:
Address Dipswitches:
• Marked in the diagram below in Blue. These LEDs indicated when a 120Vac output is being produced.
• Marked in the diagram below in Red. These dipswitches are used to assign each board its address position.
The addresses are binary and therefore the address
of a digital output board will either be address as 1
(0001) or 2 (0010).
Figure 3-3. Digital Output Board Layout
3 – 8
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Digital Input Boards
The digital input board convert 120Vdc signals from external devices to signals for the Vission 20/20 program.
All the signals are digital in that the only two states available or either on or off. See board layout, Figure 3-4.
• Marked in the diagram below in Orange. These LEDs
indicate the correct voltage of both the 5Vdc and
24Vdc power sources.
Communication LEDs:
• Marked in the diagram below in Green. These LEDs
show the active communications between the digital
output board and the Vission 20/20 CPU board.
Signal LEDs:
Address Dipswitches:
• Marked in the diagram below in light Blue. These
LEDs indicate when a 120Vac input is detected.
• Marked in the diagram below in Red. These dipswitches are used to assign each board its address
position. The addresses are binary and therefore the
address of a digital input board can only be addressed
as 3 (0011).
Voltage LEDs:
Figure 3-4. Digital Input Board Layout
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
3 – 9
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Digital In-Out Boards
Voltage LEDs:
The digital input - output board convert signals generated by the Vission 20/20 program into 120Vac signals
as well as detect external 120Vac inputs to signal the
Vission 20/20 program.
All the signals are digital in that the only two states available or either on or off. See board layout, Figure 3-5.
• Marked in the diagram below in Orange. These LEDs
indicate the correct voltage of both the 5Vdc and
24Vdc power sources.
Communication LEDs:
• Marked in the diagram below in Green. These LEDs
show the active communications between the digital
output board and the Vission 20/20 CPU board.
Address Dipswitches:
Signal LEDs:
• Marked in the diagram below in Blue or outputs and
light blue for inputs. These LEDs indicate when a
120Vac output is being produced or a 120Vac signal
is detected.
• Marked in the diagram below in Red. These dipswitches are used to assign each board its address position.
The addresses are binary and therefore the address
of a digital output board will either be address as 4
(0100) or 5 (0101).
Figure 3-5. Digital Input-Output Board Layout
3 – 10
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Analog Input Boards
Voltage LEDs:
The analog input board convert varying DC signals into
a signal that can interpreted by the Vission 20/20 program. The signals are considered analog because the
input DC signal can vary from the minimum value to the
maximum value. See board layout, Figure 3-6.
• Marked in the diagram below in Orange. These LEDs
indicate the correct voltage of both the 5Vdc and
24Vdc power sources.
Communication LEDs:
• Marked in the diagram below in Green. These LEDs
show the active communications between the digital
output board and the Vission 20/20 CPU board.
Configuration Jumpers:
Address Dipswitches:
• Marked in the diagram below in Purple. The jumpers
allow the operator to configure the signal type and
range for incoming analog signals. For the correct
jumper setting for a giving application, see Table 3-4.
Analog Input Jumper Tables.
• Marked in the diagram below in Red. These dipswitches are used to assign each board its address
position. The addresses are binary and therefore the
address of a digital output board will be address as 6
(0110), 7 (0111), 8 (1000) or 9 (1001).
Figure 3-6. Analog Input Board Layout
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
3 – 11
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Analog Input Jumper Tables
The following tables are used to configure each channel of the analog input board signal type and range desired by the
operator, see Table 3-4.
Table 3-4. Analog Input Jumper Tables
CHANNEL 1
SIGNAL
JP-1
JP-2
JP-3
JP-27
JP-35
Analog Input 1-A*
0-5 AMP
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
Analog input 1-B**
0-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
1-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
0-10 VOLT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
4-20 mA
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
ICTD
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
RTD
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
*Use Analog Input 1-A when 0-5 AMP secondary current transformers are installed in the motor starter.
**Use Analog Input 1-B when current transformers are installed in the motor starter.
CHANNEL 2
Analog Input 2
CHANNEL 3
Analog Input 3
CHANNEL 4
Analog Input 4
3 – 12
SIGNAL
JP-4
JP-5
JP-6
JP-28
0-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
1-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
0-10 VOLT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
4-20 mA
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
ICTD
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
RTD
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
SIGNAL
JP-7
JP-8
JP-9
JP-29
0-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
1-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
0-10 VOLT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
4-20 mA
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
ICTD
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
RTD
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
SIGNAL
JP-10
JP-11
JP-12
JP-30
0-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
1-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
0-10 VOLT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
4-20 mA
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
ICTD
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
RTD
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Table 3-4. Analog Input Jumper Tables (Continued)
CHANNEL 5
Analog Input 5
CHANNEL 6
Analog Input 6
CHANNEL 7
Analog Input 7
CHANNEL 8
Analog Input 8
SIGNAL
JP-13
JP-14
JP-15
JP-31
0-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
1-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
0-10 VOLT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
4-20 mA
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
ICTD
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
RTD
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
SIGNAL
JP-16
JP-17
JP-18
JP-32
0-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
1-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
0-10 VOLT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
4-20 mA
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
ICTD
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
RTD
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
SIGNAL
JP-19
JP-20
JP-21
JP-33
JP-25
0-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
2
1-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
2
0-10 VOLT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
2
4-20 mA
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
2
ICTD
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
2
RTD
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
2
ACTUATOR
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
1
POTENTIOMETER
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
3
SIGNAL
JP-22
JP-23
JP-24
JP-34
JP-26
0-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
2
1-5 VOLT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
2
0-10 VOLT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
2
4-20 mA
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
2
ICTD
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
2
RTD
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
2
ACTUATOR
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
1
POTENTIOMETER
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
3
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
3 – 13
Section 3 • Hardware Architecture
Analog Output Boards
Communication LEDs:
The Analog Output board convert signals from the
Vission 20/20 program into a current ranging from 4mA
to 20mA, see Figure 3-7.
Voltage LEDs:
• Marked in the diagram below in Orange. These LEDs
indicate the correct voltage of both the 5Vdc and
24Vdc power sources.
• Marked in the diagram below in Green. These LEDs
show the active communications between the digital
output board and the Vission 20/20 CPU board.
Address Dipswitches:
• Marked in the diagram below in Red. These dipswitches are used to assign each board its address position.
The addresses are binary and therefore the address
of a digital output board will only be addressed as 10
(1010).
Figure 3-7. Analog Output Board Layout
3 – 14
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 4 • Main Screen
Overview
The Main Screen is the first screen encountered when
powering up the Vission 20/20 Panel, see Figure 4-1.
This screen is designed as the starting point for all succeeding screens and provides as much information as
possible at a glance. The Main Screen is divided into four
sections. Three of the sections are static; Top Status Bar,
Bottom Status Bar and Parameters Bar. These three sections of the main screen will remain visible while navigating through other screens and provide a constant view
of critical information. The splash screen is the only dynamic section. All navigation to any other screens will be
performed through the Main Screen.
Figure 4-1. Main Screen
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
4 – 1
Section 4 • Main Screen
Top Status Bar
The standard view of the status bar shows three pieces
of information. From left to right , the bar shows the control method, the current run mode, and the difference
between the desired control setpoint and the actual value of the processes control value, see Figure 4-2.
The status bar also has an alternate function where it displays to the user any information that requires user attention or intervention. It accomplishes this by changing
the status bar’s color and/or flashing a additional information bars over the standard status bar view.
Information Bars will flash their information over the top
of the status bar. The operator will see the status bar
and then one or more information bars in a repetitive
sequence.
Information Bar – blue:
• Shows various operational modes that are different
than normal running condition. An example of this
would be a load limit condition. The compressor is
not able to completely load due to some parameter
like high motor current and therefore the operator is
notified via this type of information bar.
Information bar – yellow
• Indicates a condition where the compressor motor is
not running.
• This typically indicates an Alarm condition. Alarm
conditions do not stop the compressor but it is meant
to alert the operator of conditions that if corrective
action is not taken, then a compressor trip can result.
Standard Bar – green:
Information bar – red
• Informs the operator that the compressor motor is
currently running.
• Informs the operator that the compressor motor
was stopped due the condition listed in the information bar. Compressor trips are designed to protect
the equipment and any personnel operating the
equipment.
Standard Bar – blue:
Figure 4-2. Top Status Bar
4 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 4 • Main Screen
Parameter Bar
Stop Button:
The main purpose of the Parameter Bar is to display
the common operational parameters that the operator
would be most concerned with. It also gives the operator access to critical buttons such as the stop and start
buttons, see Figure 4-3.
Capacity Slide Indicator:
• Shows the position of the capacity slide from 0% to
100% via a horizontal blue bar. The buttons below the
indicator are used in manual capacity control. The “-”
button will decrease the capacity position and the
“+” button will increase the position.
Volume Slide Indicator:
• When pressed, stops the compressor in all cases.
Remote Lock Out Button:
• When pressed, activates the remote lock out option.
This is a safety feature that prevents any external devices from assuming control and starting the compressor. To release the remote lock out, the operator
must press the unit start button and then the remote
button when the start dialog box appears.
Alarm Reset Button:
• When pressed, clears any current alarms, trips or
status messages that may be displayed on the information bar. Note, if the condition that created the
alarm, trip or status message still exits, the message
will reappear.
• Shows the position of the volume slide from 0% to
100% via a horizontal blue bar. In some cases, increase and decrease buttons will appear below the
volume indicator. The buttons only appear if the operator who is logged on has sufficient privileges. If
available, the buttons work to increase and decrease
the volume slide position in the same manner as the
capacity slide.
Figure 4-3. Parameter Bar
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
4 – 3
Section 4 • Main Screen
Parameter Bar (Continued)
pressure and suction temperature.
Unit Start Button:
• The discharge box shows the current discharge pressure and discharge temperature.
• When pressed, a start dialog box will appear that
will give the operator a number of run options; Auto,
Manual, Remote, or Auto Sequencing, see Figure 4-4.
Control Parameter Boxes:
• The parameter boxes provide updated data on several key control parameters.
• The top box indicates the desired control
setpoint that is set in the Compressor Control
Screen. In the case that the Run mode is in remote capacity control, this box will show the
desired capacity position.
• The oil box shows the pressure differential
which is calculated as oil filter out pressure minus suction pressure. Filter differential is calculated as oil filter in pressure minus oil filter out
pressure. “Inj Temp” is the temperature of the
oil at the oil injection port and “Sep Temp” is the
temperature of the oil in the separator.
• The motor box shows the motor current.
• The suction box shows the current suction
Figure 4-4. Unit Start Pop-Up Window
4 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 4 • Main Screen
Bottom Status Bar
Log off Button:
The bottom status bar gives the operator easy access to
some basic functions and information. The functions are
available via the four button, see Figure 4-5.
Maintenance Button:
• Pressing the maintenance button will give the operator access to the maintenance charts and sign off
tables.
User Access Button:
• This button takes the operator to another login
screen to create additional users.
• Pressing the log off button logs off the correct user if
any are logged in.
Help Button:
• Pressing the help button takes the operator to the
help screen where the operator can access an operation and service manual and also get access to program information.
Status Bars
• The information available is provide by two status
bars, one for maintenance activities and the other for
any alarms or trips that might be active. To the right
of the status bars are positions for displaying the current user (if any are logged in), the date and time, and
the total run hours of the compressor.
Figure 4-5. Bottom Status Bar
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
4 – 5
Section 4 • Main Screen
Splash Screen
Process:
The splash screen is the dynamic portion of the screen
that will change as the operator navigates through the
Vission 20/20 panel screen, see Figure 4-6. The main
screen shows a graphic of a Vilter compressor with a
number of data boxes spread across the screen. Also on
the top left are several indicators.
• When the Process control is selected as the control
mode, this box will appear and displays the process
temperature.
% Vol:
• Displays the position of the volume slide from 0% to
100% .
Discharge:
Anti-Recycle:
• Displays the discharge pressure and temperature.
• Displays the anti-recycle time, if applicable.
Oil Filter:
Oil Pump:
• Displays the oil filter inlet pressure, oil filter outlet
pressure, and oil differential pressure across the oil
filter.
• The oil pump on a Vilter compressor often cycles on
and off depending on differential pressure. This indicator informs the operator when the oil pump is
running.
Suction:
• Displays the suction pressure and temperature.
Motor:
• Displays the motor current. When the motor VFD is
enabled, this box will also display the motor RPM.
Separator:
• Displays the temperature of the oil in the separator.
% Cap:
• Displays the position of the capacity slide from 0% to
100%.
Oil Heater:
• The oil heater often cycles on and off depending on
the separator oil temperature. This indicator informs
the operator when the oil heater is on.
Remote Lock Out:
• Displays the current status of the remote lock out.
While on, no system controller can remotely assume control of the Vission 20/20 panel and start the
compressor.
Menu Button:
• When pressed, navigates the operator to the menu
screen.
Figure 4-6. Splash Screen
4 – 6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 5 • Menu Screen
Overview
Compressor Scheduling:
The menu screen is the launching point to every other
section of the Vission 20/20 panel software. Every
screen navigated to from this screen will return to the
menu screen upon exiting, see Figure 5-1.
Navigation Buttons
• Navigates to the compressor scheduling screen
where the operator can set the scheduler to change
the control method at settable dates and times.
Compressor Sequencing:
• Navigates to the compressor sequencing screen
where the operator can set-up compressor to sequence up to four other compressors. This is also
sometimes known as lead-lag control.
Compressor Control:
Condenser Control:
• Navigates to the compressor control screen where
the operator can set the various compressor control
parameters.
• Navigates to the condenser control screen where
the operator can set up local condenser control
parameter.
Alarms and Trips:
Vilter VFD:
• Navigates to the alarms and trips screen where the operator can set the various alarm and trip parameters.
• Not currently available.
Timers:
• Navigates to the service options screen where the
operator can manually turn on/off digital and analog
outputs for maintenance and diagnostics purposes.
• Navigates to the timer screen where the operator can
set the various time related parameters.
Service Options:
Figure 5-1. Menu Screen
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
5 – 1
Section 5 • Menu Screen
Instrument Calibration:
Auxiliary I/O
• Navigates to the instrument calibration screen where
the operator can calibrate all of the system sensors.
• Navigates to the auxiliary I/O screen where an operator can configure any auxiliary instruments or
devices.
Slide Calibration:
Configuration:
• Navigates to the slide calibration screen where the
operator can calibrate the capacity and volume slide
actuators.
• Navigates to configuration screens where the initial
system parameters are configured.
Trend Chart:
Data Backup:
• Navigates to the trend chart screen where the operator can select up to four parameters for graphical historical data trending.
• Allows the operator to backup setpoints, configuration parameters, and calibration settings to a USB
memory device. In addition, this allows the restoration of previously saved database files.
Event List:
• Navigates to the event list screen where the operator
can view the systems events such as trips or alarms in
descending chronological order.
Main:
Input/Output States:
• Navigates to the Remote Oil Cooler screen where
the operator can set up local Remote Oil Cooler control parameter. Menu screen will show this option in
place of condenser control option when enabled, see
Figure 5-2.
• Allows viewing of the live data of all analog and digital input and outputs. Also allows viewing of a “snap
shot” of all analog and digital input and outputs at
the time of the last compressor fault event.
• Navigates back to the main screen.
Remote Oil Cooler:
Figure 5-2. Menu Screen with Remote Oil Cooler Enabled
5 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Overview
Suction Pressure Control and Process
Temperature Control
The compressor control screen is where an operator
can set the majority of the compressor settings. These
setting define how the compressor will operate and respond to changing loads. The compressor control screen
consists of several screens but in order not to overwhelm
the operator with options, many of the screens may not
be visible.
NOTE
How the compressor is configured in the
configuration screen (Section 19) will determine
what compressor control pages are displayed.
It is important to note that there isn’t one correct way to
set these parameters. Every application is different and
requires the operator to tune these settings to achieve
the best operation.
The Vission 20/20 uses a pulse proportional control
method to control the compressor capacity slide valve
in order to maintain the control setpoint. The control
setpoint can either be process temperature control setpoint or suction pressure control setpoint depending on
what the operator has selected as the control mode. For
screens, see Figure 6-1, Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-4.
The proportion control uses the Interval Time Setpoint
to define the time the algorithm waits to read the current setpoint and calculates the error from the process
control setpoint. Based on the error from setpoint, the
algorithm calculates a pulse time in which the capacity
slide is moved in the direction of the error. The further
away the process variable is from the control setpoint,
the larger the corrective pulse will be. The duration of
the pulse is limited by the Pulse Time Setpoint. By default the maximum pulse time is the same as the interval time. This means that the pulse time can be 100% of
Figure 6-1. Compressor Control Screen - Suction Pressure Control
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
6 – 1
Section 6 • Compressor Control
the interval time given a near continuous movement of
the capacity slide. Adjusting these setpoints can be useful in slowing down the reaction time of the compressor
if large thermal time contents are present in the refrigeration cycle. As mentioned in the above paragraph, the
distance of the process variable from the control setpoint determines the size of the pulse used to move the
capacity slide. This is called the proportional band and is
set by the Proportional Setpoint. When the process variable is outside the proportional band, the slide will move
in the direction of the error continuously. Increasing the
size of the proportional band can help slow the compressors reaction by varying loads if desired, see Figure 6-3.
The Dead Band Setpoint defines area around the control setpoint where the algorithm stops adjusting the
capacity slide. This area is a percentage of the proportional band. By default the proportional band is set to 4
Psig and the dead band is set to 10% of 4 Psig. Making
the dead band +/- 0.4 Psig of the control setpoint. Once
the process variable is within the dead band, the algorithm considers the compressor to be on setpoint. If the
operator wishes the compressor to operate closer, the
setpoint can be set to a smaller percentage. However
this will result in the capacity slide excessively moving to
maintain the setpoint and could over heat the actuator
or shorten the actuators operational life.
Auto-Cycle
The auto-cycle setpoints define the control points in
which the compressor will automatically cycle on and off
when the compressor has been placed into “Auto” run
mode. These setpoints can be “enabled” or “disabled”
using the check box. A delay can be entered to momentarily delay the start or stop from immediately occurring
when the setpoint is met. If a compressor shutdown is
desired on a suction pressure drop and a manual reset
is required, set the OFF value below the Low Suction
Pressure safety trip value. This will shut down the compressor and a Reset will be required to restart it.
The auto-cycle function will operate only in local “Auto”
mode and Direct I/O “Remote Auto” mode. If the
Figure 6-2. Compressor Control Screen - Process Temperature Control
6 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 6 • Compressor Control
auto-cycle feature is enabled while running in any other remote mode, the function will simply be ignored.
However, the Minimum slide position will continue to
be respected in Remote “Auto” mode. If the compressor changes from a remote mode back to Local “Auto”
mode, the auto-cycle feature will operate normally.
NOTE
When the Pumpdown feature is enabled, the Autocycle setpoints are automatically disabled. Pumpdown mode will cause the compressor to cycle off
via the Pump-down Stop Pressure setpoint, and will
not allow the compressor to start again.
Enable:
Start Delay:
• Delays the compressor from starting when the suction pressure meets or exceeds this setpoint.
Stop Pressure:
• When the suction pressure meets or falls below this
setpoint, the compressor will stop.
Stop Delay:
• Delays the compressor from stopping when the suction pressure meets or exceeds this setpoint.
Minimum Slide Position:
• The minimum capacity slide position that the compressor is allowed to run at.
• Enables the Auto-cycle control. Uncheck the box to
disable the Auto-cycle set-points.
Start Pressure:
• When the suction pressure meets or exceeds this setpoint, the compressor will start.
Figure 6-3. Proportional Band & Setpoint
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
6 – 3
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Figure 6-4. Compressor Control Screen - Discharge Pressure Control
6 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
Settings Control
The VFD page is where the operator can tune the motor
VFD for desired operation, see Figure 6-5. Compressor
Control Screen - VFD Settings Control. A Vilter compressor uses the variable speed of a VFD controlled motor to
vary the amount of work or capacity of the compressor.
The basic one step VFD control will use the capacity slide
to control the first half of the total available capacity and
the motor speed to control the second half of the total
available capacity, see Figure 6-6. VFD One-Step Control
Method. For example, if the compressor needs to load
to 100% of its capacity. The control algorithm will first
move the capacity slide to its maximum position, and
then the motor speed will ramp up to its maximum
speed. In the unloading direction, the motor speed will
ramp down to its minimum speed, and then the capacity
slide will move to its minimum position.
The two-step control method works much like the
one-step method but divides the control into four sections, see Figure 6-7. While loading; the compressor will
first move the capacity slide to the maximum set for step
one then speed up the motor to its maximum speed for
the same step. Once step one has completed, the control algorithm will again move the capacity slide to the
maximum position and the maximum speed of step
two. At this point the compressor would be fully loaded.
Unloading occurs in the reverse direction. The two-step
control method is not typical for most installations and
is normally used when a Vilter engineer recommends it.
NOTE
VFD installation is not covered in this manual. A VFD
that is not properly installed and configured has the
potential of causing intermittent and dangerous
problems. Please consult your VFD manual.
1 Step VFD Control:
• Enables the first step in the VFD control algorithm.
This check box is not deselectable by the operator.
Figure 6-5. Compressor Control Screen - VFD Settings Control
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
6 – 5
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Capacity Slide Position:
• Defines the minimum and maximum positions for
the capacity slide. While in 1 step control these values
should be 0% for minimum and 100% for maximum.
gives adequate control system response. Increasing
the proportional setting increases the control system’s sensitivity to small process fluctuations and the
tendency to hunt.
VFD Speed:
• Defines the minimum and maximum speed for the
motor speed. While in 1 step control these values
should reflect the full range of the VFD.
2 Step VFD Control:
• Enables the second step in the VFD control algorithm.
Capacity Slide Position:
• Defines the minimum and maximum position of the
capacity slide in the 2 step VFD control.
I = Integral (reset) setpoint:
• Used to adjust the capacity control action, integrating
the error over time, to account for a small error that
has persisted for a long time. This quantity is used for
fine adjustment. This setpoint is used to smooth out
process variations. This setpoint should be set high
enough to prevent hunting but low enough to prevent control system overshoot.
VFD Speed:
D = Derivative (rate) setpoint:
• Defines the minimum and maximum speed for the
motor in the 2 step VFD control.
• Used to adjust the capacity control action, accounting for how fast the error is changing, positively or
negatively. A standard PID loop variable, it is not used
for our applications.
P = Proportional (gain) setpoint:
• Used to adjust the motor speed action in direct proportion to the difference between the control setpoint and the process variable (SP - PV error). This is a
unit-less quantity and is used for coarse adjustment.
This setpoint should be set to the lowest value that
Figure 6-6. VFD One-Step Control Method
Figure 6-7. VFD Two-Step Control Method
6 – 6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Rapid Cycling VFD Control
The VFD page is where the operator can tune the motor
VFD for desired rapid cycling VFD operation, see Figure
6-8. A Vilter compressor uses the variable speed of a VFD
controlled motor to vary the amount of work or capacity of the compressor. The rapid Cycling VFD control will
keep capacity slide loaded to maximum and vary the
motor speed to achieve the required work or capacity.
For example, if the compressor needs to load to 100%
of its capacity. The control algorithm will keep capacity
slide loaded to its maximum position and ramp up the
motor speed up to its maximum speed. In the unloading
direction, the motor speed will ramp down to its minimum speed, keeping capacity slide loaded to maximum.
In this manner, capacity load is handled by varying motor speed only.
VFD Speed Range:
• Defines the Minimum and Maximum speed for the
motor speed. These values should reflect the full
range of the VFD.
Warm up Timer:
• Defines the Warm up period for Compressor. This
timer gets activated after every compressor start and
remains active for the defined time. During this period, Oil Pump is turned ON and motor speed is varied
from 1200 RPM to 3600 RPM.
Oil Restriction Setpoint:
• This is Compressor VFD RPM setpoint used for turning ON/OFF Oil Solenoid Digital Output. Oil Solenoid
Digital Output is turned ON when Compressor is
Running, Warm up Timer is Lapsed and Compressor
VFD RPM goes below this setpoint.
Figure 6-8. Compressor Control Screen - Rapid Cycling VFD Control
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
6 – 7
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Oil Restriction Offset:
• This is the differential offset around Oil Restriction
Setpoint. For example, if Oil Restriction Setpoint is
set to 1800 RPM and Oil Restriction Offset is set to
5 RPM, then as Compressor VFD RPM decreases to
1795 RPM, then Oil Solenoid Digital Output will be
turned ON. If Compressor VFD RPM increases to 1805
RPM, then Oil Solenoid Digital Output will be turned
OFF.
Pumpdown Control
Stop Delay:
NOTE
For use of compressor control screen - page 4, see
Cool Compression Control in Section 25.
• This setpoint delays the compressor from stopping
when the suction pressure is equal to or less than the
Stop Pressure.
The Pumpdown Control defines a method of “pumping” down a chiller, which is to draw off refrigerant from
the chiller. This feature can be enabled or disabled from
this page, see Figure 6-9. If Pumpdown is enabled, this
feature will only function when the compressor is running in local Auto Mode and Control Mode Configured is
Suction Pressure.
Min Slide Position:
If Pumpdown Feature is enabled, and then;
Pumpdown Operation (Run/Stop):
• The Auto-cycle functionality is ignored. Pumpdown
mode will cause the compressor to cycle off via the
Pumpdown Stop Pressure setpoint. Normally, the
Pumpdown Stop Pressure setpoint will be set lower
than the Auto-cycle Stop setpoint. Therefore, as the
suction pressure is pulled down, the compressor is
prevented from shutting down prematurely via the
Auto-cycle Stop setpoint by automatically ignoring
the Auto-cycle feature.
• This button starts/stops the Pumpdown operation. This button is active only when compressor is
in local Auto mode and Control Mode Configured is
Suction Pressure. This button will display “Run” when
Pumpdown operation has not started or stopped,
while button will display “Stop” when Pumpdown operation is running.
• The compressor will be placed into “Stop” mode after the suction pressure is equal to, or goes below the
Pumpdown Stop Pressure.
Pumpdown:
• This checkbox enables the Pumpdown feature. If
this box is unchecked, Pumpdown setpoints are ignored and the user is not allowed to edit Pumpdown
setpoints.
Stop Pressure:
• This setpoint defines the suction pressure value at
which the compressor will cycle off. Normally, this
setpoint is set below the Suction Pressure Auto-cycle
Stop Pressure setpoint.
6 – 8
• The minimum capacity slide is the setpoint that
the compressor is allowed to run at. By forcing the
compressor capacity to operate at a value above
minimum, we insure that the suction pressure will be
pulled down to the Stop Pressure setpoint.
When Pumpdown feature is enabled, Pulldown checkbox is automatically grayed out. Similarly when Pulldown
feature is enabled, Pumpdown checkbox is automatically
grayed out and hence, the user will not be able to operate Pumpdown feature. This is done to keep Pumpdown
and Pulldown features mutually exclusive.
Pulldown Control
The Pulldown Control defines a method of slowly pulling the suction pressure down from a high value. This is
sometimes required on systems that have liquid recirculation systems or on new building to prevent structural
damage by limiting the rate at which to build is cooled.
This feature can be enabled or disabled from this page,
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 6 • Compressor Control
see Figure 6-9. If Pulldown is enabled, this feature will
only function when the compressor is running in local
Auto, Auto Sequencing mode and the Control mode is
Suction Pressure 1.
The Pulldown feature provides a method to slowly pull
the suction pressure down to operating conditions. The
pulldown method used is to step the suction pressure
down over a defined time interval.
Example:
Assume the suction pressure is at 85 psig and the setpoint we want to get to is 20 psig. The operator wants to
allow 48 hours of pulldown time. Pick a reasonable step
pressure of 5 psig for every step. This defines a change of
(80 – 20 = 60) psig.
1.
Note: First step is applied immediately. So first step
starts at (85 – 5 = 80) psig
2.
Number of steps = delta 60 psig change * 1 step/5
psig = 12 steps.
3.
Delay per Step = 48 hours / 12 steps = 4 hours/step.
4.
So for the first 4 hours, the compressor runs at 80
psig.
5.
Next 4 hours @ 75 psig
6.
Next 4 hours @ 70 psig
7.
And so forth.
After the 12th step (running at 25 psig), 48 hours will
have elapsed, and the new setpoint becomes 20 psig,
achieving the 20 psig setpoint after 48 hours. After the
pulldown setpoint is equal to or is less than the control
setpoint, the pulldown feature will disable itself.
Pulldown:
• This checkbox enables the Pulldown feature. If this
box is unchecked, Pulldown setpoints are ignored
and the operator is not allowed to edit Pulldown
setpoints.
Figure 6-9. Compressor Control Screen - Pumpdown/Pulldown Control
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
6 – 9
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Initiate Pulldown at Next Start:
• This checkbox when enabled, turns on the Pulldown
process at the next start cycle, Pulldown operation
will work in the following manners:
• Pulldown only works when Control mode is
Suction Pressure 1.
• If not started in Suction Pressure 1 then
Pulldown process will not run until stopped and
restarted in Suction Pressure 1.
• If started in Suction Pressure 1 and changed
after start, then Pulldown process will be suspended and restart once Control mode is
changed back to Suction Pressure 1.
Step Pressure:
• This setpoint defines the step decrements at which
the suction pressure value will be controlled at.
Delay Per Step:
• This setpoint defines the time increment at which the
compressor will be controlled at each step.
Stop Pressure:
• This setpoint defines the suction pressure value at
which Pulldown operation will get completed. When
suction pressure value is equal to or goes below
this setpoint, Pulldown feature disables itself. Also
“Pulldown” and “Initiate Pulldown at Next Start”
checkboxes will be automatically deselected as normally this is one time use feature.
Auto Cycle Differential:
• This setpoint defines the offset pressure values for
Auto Cycle Start Pressure and Stop Pressure from the
Suction Pressure setpoint. Auto Cycle Start Pressure
setpoint will be Suction Pressure setpoint incremented by this setpoint pressure value, while Auto Cycle
Stop Pressure value will be Suction Pressure setpoint
decremented by this setpoint pressure value.
When Pulldown feature is enabled, Pumpdown checkbox
is automatically grayed out. Similarly when Pumpdown
feature is enabled, Pulldown checkbox is automatically
grayed out and hence, the user will not be able to operate Pulldown feature. This is done to keep Pulldown &
Pumpdown features mutually exclusive.
6 – 10
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Control Mode
This drop down box gives the operator the ability to
change the type of control mode such as suction pressure control or process temperature control. The operator can also switch from setpoint 1 and setpoint 2 for
each control method. What is available in this dropdown
box is dependent on the number and type of control selected in the configuration screen, see Figure 6-10.
Stop load:
• When this value is reached, the capacity slide will not
advance in any condition.
Force Unload:
• When this value is reached, the capacity slide position will decrease until the variable reading is below
this value.
High Motor Amps:
• Motor current values for stop load and force unload.
Stop Load and Force Unload
The stop load and force unload feature’s primary purpose is to attempt to prevent the compressor from
tripping off due to particular instrument reading. For
example, if the suction pressure drops too low, the compressor will trip off for safety reasons. However, the stop
load & force unload algorithm recognizes a potential trip
and either stops the compressor from loading up or even
unloads the compressor to prevent the trip.
High Discharge Pressure:
• Discharge pressure value for stop load and force
unload.
Low Suction Pressure:
• Suction pressure values for stop load and force unload
High Discharge Superheat:
• Discharge temperature superheat values for stop
load and force unload. This is only used for Cool
Compression.
Figure 6-10. Compressor Control Screen - Misc. 1 (Control Mode)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
6 – 11
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Capacity Slide Triggered Outputs
Port 2 follows the setpoint of Economizer Port 1.
Active:
The Vission 20/20 offers two digital outputs that can be
triggered at a specified capacity slide position. By default, the outputs are preselected for economizer and
hot gas bypass. However, these preselected outputs are
customizable by the operator, see Figure 6-11.
• Check box to enable the digital output. There is no
check box for enabling Economizer Port 2 digital
output. Economizer Port 2 digital output is enabled
when Compressor type selected from configuration
screen is “VSM7” and Economizer Port 1 digital output is enabled.
Slide Valve Setpoint:
• Operator editable labels for the each output. Only
Economizer Port 2 Label is non-editable.
Slide %:
• Indicates the capacity slide position where the digital
output is triggered.
State Below Setpoint:
• Defines the state of the digital output when the slide
position is below the “Slide %” setpoint. The operator
can choose between “N.O.” or “N.C.”. This setpoint
is not available for Economizer Port 2, so Economizer
Figure 6-11. Compressor Control Screen - Misc. 2 (Economizer & Hot Gas Bypass Control)
6 – 12
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Volume Slide Position Offset
algorithm runs.
Rate Dead Band:
These setpoints offer the ability to alter the Volume position table to take advantage of potential energy savings. Since the volume position is a function of the capacity position, the offset to the volume is based on the
position of the capacity slide. The volume offset can be
applied to the entire capacity slide range or just a portion using the Capacity Range minimum and maximum
setpoints.
• Defines the rate at which the capacity slide movement will be interrupted. This value is an absolute value of the process variable. For example, the default
value is 0.25. If the control mode is suction pressure,
then this value is 0.25 Psig or if process temperature
is the control mode then the value would be 0.25°F.
Oil Control
Volume Slide Adjustment %:
• The value in percentage of the volume slide offset.
Capacity Range:
• Defines the range that the volume position slide offset will be applied.
Soft Load
These setpoints determine how the Vission 20/20 will
manage the oil of the compressor, see Figure 6-12.
Oil Pump Press Restart Ratio:
• The on and off setpoints define when the oil pump
will cycle on and off if the oil pump is selected to cycle
from the configuration screen.
Oil Separator Heater Temp:
This setpoint is used to slow the loading of the compressor. In some refrigeration systems, a loading compressor can have dramatic effects on the system parameters.
This setpoint allows an operator to reduce the continuous load pulse as defined in the proportional control section to a percent duty cycle.
Soft load %:
• Defines the duty cycle of the continuous load pulse.
At 100%, the continuous pulse will truly be continuous. At 50%, the continuous pulse would be reduced
to half time on and half time off in the time interval
defined in the proportional control section.
Load Anticipating
• When the oil temperature falls below this setpoint
the oil heater will turn on. Note, there is a 5°F differential associated with this setpoint. For example, when
set at 100°F, the heater will turn on at 95°F and off at
105°F.
Liquid Injection
The setpoints in this section are to control the behavior
of the liquid refrigerant injected into the compressor for
oil cooling purposes. The liquid injection solenoid control is based off of discharge temperature whether the
compressor uses just an injection solenoid or a motorized valve in conjunction with the solenoid.
Liquid Injection Solenoid Control ONLY
The purpose of the load anticipating algorithm is to reduce the amount of overshoot of the capacity slide position while the compressor attempts to meet the control
setpoint. This advanced feature of the Vission 20/20
closely monitors the rate of change of the process variable and compares it to the control setpoint. If the process variable is changing in the direction of the control
setpoint at the specified rate or greater, then the normal
command to move the capacity slide is interrupted. The
rate is calculated between time intervals set in the proportional control section of this screen.
Enable Load Anticipation Algorithm:
• Allows the operator to choose if the load anticipation
• When using only the liquid injection solenoid, the solenoid is activated once the value of discharge temperature meets or exceeds the value of “Liquid inj.
Setpoint 1” and the value of oil separator temperature meets or exceeds the value of “Oil Sep. Temp.
Override”. The injection solenoid will deactivate if
either of setpoints are not met. This will prevent situations where the discharge temperature may rise
quickly, but the oil temperature is still very cold. By
preventing the liquid injection solenoid from turning
on at this point, the oil separator will not be subjected
to additional liquid refrigerant, that would cool the oil
even further.
Liquid Injection Control using a 4-20ma motorized valve:
• When a motorized valve is used to control the amount
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
6 – 13
Section 6 • Compressor Control
of liquid being injected into the compressor the previously mentioned setpoints have a slightly different
function. The Oil Sep. Temp. Override is still used in
controlling the injection solenoid, however the Liquid
Inj. Setpoint 1 is now used as the target temperature
for the PID Algorithm that controls the position of
the motorized valve. The algorithm compares the
actual discharge temperature against the Liquid Inj.
Setpoint 1. The difference between these is the error.
The PID algorithm tries to drive the error to “zero” by
moving the positioning valve to allow more or less
liquid refrigerant to be injected into the compressor.
• PID algorithm can be notoriously hard to tune. As
a result the Vission 20/20 offers a couple of additional features to help control wild fluctuations in
oil temperatures that could result in the compressor tripping off. The operator can choose to enable
the minimum value position that automatically sets
the liquid injection motorized value to the specified
value whenever the discharge temperature has fallen
below the Liquid inj. Setpoint 1. This feature nearly
eliminates the overshoot of the PID in the downward
direction and reduces the chance of the compressor
tripping off due to low oil temperature. The operator
can also choose to use an average of the discharge
temperature and the oil manifold temperature as the
control variable. The discharge temperature can vary
quite drastically forcing the PID algorithm to drastically adjust the motorized value. By averaging the
more stable oil manifold temperature and discharge
temperature, the control variable stabilizes and the
PID is more easily tuned.
Please note that as stated above, PID algorithms can be
difficult to tune and there is no one set of PID values that
will work. The work required for a compressor to meet
the requirement of its installation vary greatly and therefore the amount of heat transferred to the oil varies just
as greatly. We recommend the operator consult PID tuning guides available from many different sources before
attempting to tune this PID.
Figure 6-12. Compressor Control Screen - Oil Control & Liquid Injection Control
6 – 14
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 6 • Compressor Control
Liquid Inj. Setpoint 1:
• Setpoint at which the liquid solenoid will activate if in
solenoid control or if the setting for the control variable for the PID is in liquid motorized value control.
Liquid Inj. Setpoint 2:
• Not yet available
Oil Sep. Temp. Override:
• Defines the temperature the oil must reach before the
liquid injection solenoid is allowed to be activated.
P = Proportional (Gain):
• Used to adjust the positioning valve in direct proportion to the difference between the control setpoint
and the discharge temperature (SetPt - DT = error).
The proportional term is a unit-less quantity and is
used for coarse adjustment. This setpoint should be
set to the lowest value that gives adequate response
to the control system. Increasing the proportional
setting increases the control system’s sensitivity to
small discharge temperature fluctuations and the
tendency to hunt.
I = Integral (reset):
• This parameter integrates the error over time, to account for a small error that has persisted for a long
time. This quantity is used for fine adjustment. This
setpoint is used to smooth out discharge temperature variations. This setpoint should be set high
enough to prevent hunting but not too high or it will
cause control system overshoot.
D = Derivative (rate):
• This parameter accounts for how fast the error is
changing, positively or negatively.
Minimum Valve Open %:
• When enabled, this is the valve position used whenever the control variable drops below Liquid inj.
Setpoint 1. Use only if the compressor is tripping off
for low oil temperature due to large overshoots and
all other tuning methods have failed.
Avg. with Oil Manifold Temperature:
• When enabled, averages the Oil manifold temperature and the discharge temperature. This creates
a more stable control variable and should result in
more stable control.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
6 – 15
6 – 16 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 7 • Alarms and Trips
Overview
side tabs in the input/output screens and are very useful
as a troubleshooting tool for the operator.
The Alarms and Trips screen allows the operator to view
and adjust settings for compressor safety and alarm settings. For Alarms and Trips Screen Pages refer to Figures
7-1, 7-2, 7-3 and 7-4.
The Vission 20/20 uses Warnings as a way to notify the
operator of parameters that may inhibit the compressor
when started. Warnings are monitored only when compressor is not running. Warnings are always displayed
as a orange banner on bottom status bar. Warnings
uses the alarm setpoint for detection and message. All
warnings messages present can be seen collectively in a
pop-up window. This pop-up is displayed when warning
condition is present and bottom status bar used for displaying warnings is pressed.
Vission 20/20 uses Alarms as a way to notify the operator of running parameters that if left unchecked could
result in the compressor shutting down due to a trip.
Trips are the conditions that exceed the safety limits of
the compressor or refrigeration system and stops the
compressor. Trips are always displayed as a red banner
and alarms are yellow banners on the top and bottoms
status bars.
Alarms and trip conditions are also logged to provide
an operational history for the operator. Both alarms
and trips will be logged in the event list accessible from
the menu screen. Trips also trigger the input/output
screen to take a snapshot of all input and output values
as freeze screen. The freeze screens are available as left
Alarms and Trips Setpoints
Reference Figure 7-1.
Low Suction Pressure (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the low suction pressure safety. This safety
is active in both temperature and pressure control
Figure 7-1. Alarms and Trips Screen - Page 1
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
7 – 1
Section 7 • Alarms and Trips
modes. An alarm or trip will be activated if the suction pressure falls below the setpoint values.
High Discharge Pressure (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the high discharge pressure safety. The alarm
or trip will be activated if the discharge pressure rises
above the setpoint value.
High Process Temperature (Alarm only)
• This alarm is active when the process temperature
is at or above the setpoint value. There is no trip
setpoint.
Low Process Temperature (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the low control temperature safety. This safety
is active when process temperature control has been
selected in the Control Mode dropdown selection
found in the Compressor Control screen. An alarm or
trip will be activated on a drop in process temperature below the setpoint value.
Reference Figure 7-2.
Low Suction Temperature (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the low suction temperature safety. The alarm
or trip will be activated if the suction temperature
drops below the setpoint value.
High Discharge Temperature (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the high discharge temperature safety. The
alarm or trip will be activated if the discharge temperature rises above the setpoint value.
Low Oil Separator Start Temperature (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the starting low oil separator temperature
safety. The compressor is prevented from starting
or running if the oil in the separator is below the
alarm value. After a time delay (setting of the Oil
Separator Temperature Safety Changeover timer),
this safety is deactivated and the Low Oil Separator
Run Temperature alarm and safety setpoints become
active.
Low Oil Separator Run Temperature (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the running low oil separator temperature
Figure 7-2. Alarms and Trips Screen - Page 1 as Level 2 User
7 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 7 • Alarms and Trips
safety. After a time delay, (setting of the Oil Separator
Temperature Safety Changeover timer), the Low Oil
Separator Start Temperature is bypassed and Low
Oil Separator Run Temperature alarm and safety setpoints become active. The alarm or trip will be activated if the oil temperature in the separator drops
below the setpoint value.
Low Oil Injection Temperature (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the low oil injection safety. The alarm and
trip setpoints are bypassed at start for a time period (setting of the Oil Injection Temperature Safety
Changeover timer). The alarm and trip will be activated after the time delay has expired.
High Oil Injection Temperature (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the high oil injection temperature safety. The
alarm or trip will be activated if the oil injection temperature rises above the setpoint value.
High Superheat Start Temperature (Trip Only):
• This is the starting high discharge superheat temperature safety. This safety is active when superheat
monitor is enabled in the configuration screen. The
compressor is prevented from starting or running if
the superheat is above the setpoint value. The warning or trip will be activated if the superheat temperature rises above the setpoint value. There is no
ALARM setpoint.
High Superheat Run Temperature (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the running high discharge superheat temperature safety. This safety is active when superheat monitor is enabled in the configuration screen.
After a time delay, (setting of the High Superheat
Temperature Safety Changeover timer), the High
Superheat Start Offset Temperature is bypassed and
High Superheat Run Temperature alarm and safety
setpoints become active. The alarm or trip will be activated if the superheat temperature rises above the
setpoint value.
High Superheat Start Offset Temperature (Trip Only):
• This is the starting high discharge superheat temperature safety. This safety is active when superheat monitor is enabled in the configuration screen.
Figure 7-3. Alarms and Trips Screen - Page 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
7 – 3
Section 7 • Alarms and Trips
After a time delay, (setting of the High Superheat
Temperature Safety Changeover timer), this safety is
deactivated and the High Superheat Run Temperature
alarm and safety setpoints become active. The trip
will be activated if the superheat temperature from
start rises above the superheat temperature plus the
setpoint value. There is no ALARM setpoint.
Reference Figure 7-3.
Prelube Oil Pressure (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the prelube oil pump failure safety. If prelube
oil pressure does not rise by prelube alarm setting
configured with in prelube oil pressure trials of prelube oil pressure monitor time for a minimum time
set at Minimum Comp. Prelube Time, then the start
sequence will be aborted. The prelube oil pressure
trials, prelube oil pressure monitor time, Minimum
Comp. Prelube Time is set on the Timer screen. The
prelube oil pressure is defined as manifold pressure
minus discharge pressure during the start sequence,
zeroed prelube oil pressure difference value is shown
on main screen during start sequence. The prelube
oil pressure is redefined as manifold pressure minus
suction pressure after the start sequence. This safety
insures adequate lubrication of the compressor at
startup.
Low (Run) Oil Pressure (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the running oil pressure safety. The normal
alarm and trip setpoints of this safety are “messaged”
as soon as the compressor starts. The “Pre lube Oil
Pressure” Alarm and Trip setpoints are substituted
into this safety setpoints for a time of the “Oil Pressure
Bypass” timer (typically 60 seconds). After this timer
expires, then the setpoints return back to the normal
settings. The action of adjusting the setpoints for
about a minute allows the (Run) Oil Pressure to build
up to normal running pressures after the compressor
starts. After the Oil Pressure Bypass Timer has expired, the Oil Pressure must be above the normal setpoints, or else an Alarm or Trip will occur. An alarm or
trip will be active if the oil pressure drops below the
Figure 7-4. Alarms and Trips Screen - Page 3
7 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 7 • Alarms and Trips
normal setpoint values after the Oil Pressure Bypass
timer has expired. This time limit is set on the Timer
menu screen. Run oil pressure is defined as manifold
pressure minus suction pressure.
High Filter Differential Pressure Start (Alarm & Trip):
• This safety allows a higher than normal filter differential pressure to exist during the first minute after
a compressor starts. This allows time for cold oil that
is present in the oil piping and filters to be passed
and replaced with warmer oil. After a time delay (setting of the Filter Diff Pressure Safety Changeover
timer), this safety is deactivated and the High Filter
Differential Pressure-Run alarm and safety setpoints
become active. An alarm or trip will be active if the
filter differential (= Filter Inlet Pressure minus Filter
Outlet Pressure) exceeds the setpoint value.
Safety Failure Messages
Low Suction Pressure Trip
• This message will appear when the suction pressure falls below the safety setting of the Low Suction
Pressure Trip Setpoint No.1 or No. 2.
High Discharge Pressure Trip
• This message will appear when the discharge pressure exceeds the safety setting of the Hi Dsch Press
Trip Setpoint No. 1 or No. 2.
Low Suction Temp Trip
• This message will appear when the suction temperature falls below the safety setting of the Low Suction
Temperature Trip setpoint.
High Filter Differential Pressure Run (Alarm & Trip):
High Discharge Temp Trip
• This safety setpoint is active when the compressor has started and the Filter Diff Pressure Safety
Changeover timer has timed out. An alarm or trip will
be active if the filter differential (= Filter Inlet Pressure
minus Filter Outlet Pressure) exceeds by the setpoint
value.
• This message will appear when the discharge temperature rises above the safety setting of the High
Discharge Temperature Trip setpoint.
High Motor Amps:
• This safety setpoint is active after the Volume
Decrease At Start Timer expires (this timer is not
setable by the operator). A trip will occur if the motor amperage exceeds the safety setpoint value. For
a motor with a 1.15 Service Factor, the trip setpoint
should be set at 125% of the motor full load amperage value. The alarm setpoint should be set at 120%
of the motor full load amperage value.
Low Run Pressure Ratio (Alarm & Trip):
• This is the low run pressure ratio safety. This safety is
active when Cool Compression is enabled in the configuration screen. An alarm or trip will be active if the
pressure ratio drops below the setpoint values after
the Low Pressure Ratio Bypass timer has expired.
Compressor Inhibits
The Vission 20/20 uses several start inhibits to prevent
the compressor from starting to protect the compressor and the refrigeration system. While starting the
compressor, the inhibits are checked first before the oil
pump is started or the motor is started. The failed starts
due to an inhibit does not count toward any of the antirecycle timers including hot starts. The Inhibits uses the
alarm setpoint to trigger an aborted start and message.
All inhibits will be logged in the event list.
Low Oil Separator Temp Trip
• This message will appear when the Oil Separator
Temp is below the Low Oil Separator Start Temp Trip
setpoint. In addition this message will appear after
the Oil Separator Temp Safety Changeover timer
times out and the Oil Separator temperature fails to
rise above the Low Oil Separator Start Temp Reset after the compressor is started.
Low Oil Separator Temp Trip
• This message will appear when the Oil Separator
Temp is below the Low Oil Separator Run Temp
Reset setpoint after the Oil Separator Temp Safety
Changeover timer times out.
Low Process Temp Trip
• This message will appear when the Process Control
Temperature falls below the safety setting of the Lo
Control Temperature Trip Setpoint.
Prelube Oil Pump Inhibit
• This message will appear when the Prelube Oil
Pressure (Manifold minus Discharge) has remained
below the Prelube Oil Pressure Reset setpoint. The
oil pump will try to generate “prelube pressure” for
the time period of the Low Oil Pressure Safety Bypass
timer setting.
Low Oil Pressure Trip
• This message will appear when the Running Oil
Pressure (Manifold minus Suction) has remained below the low Oil Pressure Reset setpoint when the Oil
Pressure Bypass Start timer times out. This message
will also appear when the Running Oil Pressure falls
below the Low Oil Pressure trip setpoint after the Low
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
7 – 5
Section 7 • Alarms and Trips
Oil Pressure Safety Bypass timer times out.
Compressor Warnings
Low Oil Injection Temp Trip
High Level Shutdown Warning
• This message will appear when the Oil Injection temperature falls below the Low Oil Injection Temperature
trip setpoint. This message will also appear when the
Oil Injection temperature fails to rise above the Low
Oil Injection Temperature reset setpoint after the
Low Oil Injection Temp Bypass timer times out.
• This message will appear when High Level Shutdown
switch is Active Low.
High Oil Injection Temp Trip
• This message will appear when the Oil Injection
temperature rises above the High Oil Injection
Temperature trip setpoint.
High Filter Differential Trip
• This message will appear if the Filter Differential
Pressure rises above the High Fltr Diff Press – Start
setpoint before the Filter Differential Pressure Safety
Changeover timer times out.
High Filter Differential Trip
• This message will appear if the Filter Differential
pressure rises above the High Fltr Diff Press Run
setpoint after the Filter Differential Pressure Safety
Changeover timer times out.
High Motor Current Trip
• This message will appear if the motor amperage rises
above the Hi Motor Amps trip setpoint.
Compressor Interlock Trip
• This message will appear if the Motor Auxiliary contact fails to close before the Compressor Starter
Auxiliary Contact Bypass timer times out. Refer to
wiring diagram.
High Level Shutdown Trip
• This message will appear when power is removed
from the input module that is designated as “Auxiliary
#1 Safety” Refer to wiring diagram.
False Start
• This message appears when the compressor stops
and the motor auxiliary contact fails to open. The
message will also appear if the compressor shuts
down and the amperage is 20% of the maximum amp
setting, indicating that the starter is still energized.
Low Oil Level Trip
• This message appears when power is removed from
the designated input module, refer to wiring diagram. This safety will activate only after the oil level
has been low for the time period defined by the “Low
Oil Separator Safety Trip Delay” timer.
Low Process Temp Warning
• This message will appear when Process Control
Temperature falls below the safety setting of the
Low Process Temperature Alarm setpoint.
High Discharge Pressure Warning
• This message will appear when the Discharge
Pressure exceeds the safety setting of the High
Discharge Pressure Alarm setpoint.
High Discharge Temp Warning
• This message will appear when the Discharge
Temperature exceeds the safety setting of the High
Discharge Temperature Alarm setpoint.
Low Suction Pressure Warning
• This message will appear when Suction Pressure falls
below the safety setting of Low Suction Pressure
Alarm setpoint.
Low Suction Temp Warning
• This message will appear when Suction Temperature
falls below the safety setting of Low Suction
Temperature Alarm setpoint.
Low Oil Separator Start Temp Warning
• This message will appear when the Oil Separator
Temperature falls below the safety setting of the Low
Oil Separator Start Temp Alarm setpoint.
High Oil Injection Temp Warning
• This message will appear when the Oil Injection
Temperature exceeds the safety setting of the High
Oil Injection Temp Alarm setpoint.
High Filter Differential Warning
• This message will appear when the Filter Differential
Pressure exceeds the safety setting of the High Filter
Diff Start Pressure Alarm setpoint.
High Superheat Temp Warning
• This message will appear when the Discharge
Superheat Temperature exceeds the safety setting of
the High Superheat Start Temp Trip setpoint.
Analog Aux in 1-16 Warning
• This message will appear when the Analog Aux in
1-16 exceeds / falls below the safety setting of the
High / Low Alarm setpoint.
Digital Aux in 1-16 Warning
• This message will appear when the Digital Aux in 1-8
is Active High / Low.
7 – 6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 8 • Timers
Overview
Delays:
The timers screen allows the operator to view and adjust
timer settings associated with compressor operation.
There are different types of timers that the operator
should be aware of listed below. For Timer Screen Pages,
see Figures 8-1 and 8-2.
• Delays require the condition to occur for the specified amount of time.
Timers:
• A general timer requiring the time to expire before
the listed event can occur.
Timer Setpoints
Reference Figure 8-1
Changeover:
• The changeover timers will change from one type
control to another once the compressor has started
and then the timer has expired.
Bypass:
•
The bypass timers prevent certain alarm and trip
checks from occurring until the compressor has
started and then the time has expired.
Capacity Increase Start Delay:
• At compressor startup, the capacity slide position is
held at minimum position for this time period. This is
to allow compressor and system conditions to stabilize. After the timer expires, the slide is free to move
in accordance to the system demands.
Minimum Compressor Pre-lube Time:
• This is the length of time the oil pump will run, after
establishing Pre-lube Oil Pressure, to prime the oil circuit before starting the compressor.
Figure 8-1. Timers Screen - Page 1
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
8 – 1
Section 8 • Timers
Low Oil Pressure Safety Bypass:
Low Oil Separator Temperature Safety Changeover:
• This is the length of time in which the normal Low
(Run) Oil Pressure setpoints will be adjusted by the
values of the Pre-lube Oil Pressure setpoints. After
the timer has expired, the normal Low Oil Pressure
setpoints become active.
• This timer allows Low Oil Separator Start Temperature
safety setpoint to protect the compressor against
cold oil during starting. After the timer has expired,
the Low Oil Separator Run Temperature is then active.
Prelube Oil Pressure Monitor Time:
• This timer bypasses the Low Oil Injection Temperature
Safety setpoint during start-up, to allow any cold oil in
the oil lines and filter to pass. After the timer expires,
the Low Oil Injection Temperature safety is active.
Low Oil Injection Safety Bypass:
• The Prelube Oil Pressure Monitor time defines timer
to monitor raise in prelube oil pressure against prelube oil pressure alarm settings. If prelube oil pressure is unable to raise by oil pressure alarm settings
in Prelube oil pressure monitor time then it restarts
oil pump.
Reference Figure 8-2.
Prelube Oil Pressure Monitor Trials:
Max Restart After Power Failure:
• The Prelube oil pressure monitor trials defines
maximum number of retries to monitor prelube oil
pressure.
• This timer forces the compressor to wait for the set
time period after a power failure and the panels restarts before it can be started automatically. By staggering the time settings of this timer between other
compressor panels, the compressors can be allowed
to start automatically, one at a time, after a power
failure. This will prevent excessive load demand on
the power system that could occur if all of the compressor equipment were to start at the same time.
The Power-up Auto Re-Start [x]Enable option must
be selected on the Configuration screen for this option to be active.
Prelube Oil Pressure Safety Changeover:
• After compressor starts, drop in prelube oil pressure
is monitored for prelube oil pressure safety changeover time. If prelube oil pressure drops with in prelube oil pressure safety changeover time then compressor trips on prelube oil pressure trip.
High Filter Differential Pressure Safety Changeover:
• This timer bypasses the High Filter Differential Run
Pressure safety settings when the compressor starts.
It defines how long the High Filter Differential Start
Pressure setpoints will be active after the compressor starts. After the timer has expired, then the High
Filter Differential Run Pressure safety setpoints will be
active.
Oil Separator Level #1 Safety Trip Delay:
• This timer bypasses the low oil level switch for momentary drops in the oil level. This timer activates
when the low oil level switch opens, and deactivates
when the switch closes. If the switch is still open after the timer has timed out, the compressor will be
shut down and a trip message will be displayed. This
timer is available if the unit is equipped with a low oil
separator float switch (the oil level switch is standard
on all liquid injection units and optional on all others).
Oil Separator Level #2 Safety Trip Delay:
• This timer bypasses the low oil level switch for momentary drops in the oil level. This timer activates
when the low oil level switch opens, and deactivates
when the switch closes. If the switch is still open after the timer has timed out, the compressor will be
shut down and a trip message will be displayed. This
timer is available if the unit is equipped with a low oil
separator float switch (the oil level switch is standard
on all liquid injection units and optional on all others).
8 – 2
Hot Starts per Hour:
• This counter counts compressor starts. After every
start, a one-hour timer is reset and starts timing. If
the timer times out, the hot starts counter is reset.
When the counter reaches its preset value, it will not
allow another compressor start until the one-hour
timer times out and resets the counter. The hot starts
counter, therefore, will be reset when the time between compressor starts total one hour. This counter allows repetitive compressor starts, but once the
counter has reached its set point, it requires a onehour window between compressor starts in order for
the counter to be reset.
True Anti-Recycle Timer:
• Once the compressor turns off, this timer will keep
the compressor off for the setting of the True AntiRecycle Timer. This timer is used to prevent short cycling of the compressor.
Accumulative Anti-Recycle Timer:
• This timer forces a specified time between compressor starts. When the compressor starts, the timer
resets and starts timing and accumulates running
time. Once the compressor shuts down, it will not
be allowed to restart for the remainder of time left
on the Accumulative Anti-Recycle Timer. Unlike the
True Anti-Recycle Timer, if the compressor has run
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 8 • Timers
for a time period that exceeds the setpoint of the
Accumulative Anti-Recycle Timer, then when the
compressor shuts down, it will be allowed to restart
immediately.
Compressor Interlock Bypass:
• Once the Vission 20/20 has sent a command to the
compressor starter to start, a return signal is expected. This timer defines how much time to wait for that
signal before setting a trip condition.
High Motor Amps Safety Bypass:
• Starting motors can typically pull much more than
its rates full load amps for a short time. This timer ignores that sudden inrush of current for the specified
time.
Emergency Stop Timer:
• Defines the amount of time the compressor is in a
False start condition before activating the Emergency
stop. The emergency stop output can be connected
to a shunt-trip in the case of a run away compressor
to remove all power to the system.
Low Suction Pressure Safety Bypass:
• Sets the time that the compressor is allowed to run
at lower suction pressure then would usually be allow
at start-up.
High Superheat Temp Safety Changeover:
• This timer activates at shutdown and changes the restart parameters if the time has not been met.
Figure 8-2. Timers Screen - Page 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
8 – 3
8 – 4 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 9 • Compressor Scheduling
Overview
symbol to indicate the operator to correct events and
then enable feature.
This menu allows the operator to schedule control setpoint switching during the day and week. This feature
can be enabled and disabled from the Compressor
Schedule screen. Up to four setpoint “switch” events can
be scheduled per day, see Figure 9-1.
Scheduling Setpoint
Schedule:
• The options for selection are “Enable” & “Disable”.
The operator is allowed to configure setpoints related to schedule events, but only when the schedule is
disabled.
• The operator can Enable Compressor Scheduling
Feature, only if Time Intervals are in order of Event 1
< Event 2 < Event 3 < Event 4 for all days. If events are
not in order, invalid events are marked with caution
Control Mode:
• These drop-down boxes allow selection of operating modes which gets switched once schedule event
time is achieved.
• The list of allowable modes depends on the number
of controllers selected in the configuration screen.
For example, if the number of Suction Pressure
Control Setpoints selected is “2” and the number
of Process Temperature Control Setpoints selected
is “1”, then Control Mode drop-down box will have
“Unscheduled”, “Suction Pressure SP1”, “Suction
Pressure SP2” and “Process Temperature SP1” as options for selection.
• If Control Mode is selected as “Unscheduled” and
Time set in an event is achieved, then control mode
will not get switched. Hence Control Mode can be set
as “Unscheduled” if operator does not want to use all
4 events per day.
Figure 9-1. Compressor Scheduling Screen
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
9 – 1
Section 9 • Compressor Scheduling
Time:
• This setpoint allows selection of Hours, Minutes and
AM/PM values for an event. When time set for an
event is achieved, control mode will get changed as
selected for that event.
• The range of values allowed to set for Hours setpoint
is 0 – 12 for 12 hour format and 0 – 23 for 24 hour format. The range of values allowed to set for Minutes
setpoint is 0 – 59. AM/PM selection is active for selection only when Time Format selected in configuration screen is 12 hour.
When scheduling feature is enabled and No. of controllers for Suction Pressure Control & Process Temperature
Control are changed in configuration screen which
makes control modes selected in compressor scheduling screen as invalid, then feature will get disabled automatically and indication will be sent to operator to correct the setting.
9 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 10 • Compressor Sequencing
Overview
Compressor sequencing screen is where more than one
Vission 20/20 panels can be sequenced in network using
Modbus TCP. These settings define how the master compressor should control sequenced Vission 20/20 panels.
This feature is enabled from the Configuration Screen,
see Section 19 for Compressor Sequencing.
Pressure / Temperature Control
Setpoints
Compressor Sequencing screen defines settings
those are used by master compressor for sequencing. For Pressure Control Setpoints see Figure 10-1, for
Temperature Control Setpoints see Figure 10-2.
Load Rate 2 offset (outer):
offset to monitor compressor load. If Suction pressure / process temperature surpasses Load Rate 1 offset and goes beyond Load Rate 2 setpoint offset then
sequencing decisions are made according to Load
Rate 2 timer.
Load Rate 1 offset (inner):
• Defines the inner pressure/temp setpoint offset to
monitor compressor load. If Suction pressure / process temperature goes beyond Load Rate 1 setpoint
offset then sequencing decisions are made according
to Load Rate 1 timer.
Suction Pressure/Process Temperature Control Setpoint:
• The target setpoints are read only values here.
These setpoints can be changed by logging on to
“Compressor Control” Screen.
Unload Rate 1 Offset (inner):
• Defines the inner pressure/temp setpoint to monitor compressor load. If Suction Pressure/Process
Temperature Control drops below Unload Rate 1
• Defines the outer pressure/temperature setpoint
Figure 10-1. Compressor Sequencing Screen - Page 1
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
10 – 1
Section 10 • Compressor Sequencing
setpoint offset then sequencing decisions are made
according to Unload Rate 1 timer.
Unload Rate 2 Offset (outer):
• Defines the outer Pressure/Temp setpoint offset
to monitor compressor load. If Suction Pressure/
Process Temperature drops below Unload Rate 1
offset and goes below Unload Rate 2 setpoint offset,
then sequencing decisions are made according to
Unload Rate 2 timer.
Load Rate 1 (Inner):
• If Suction Pressure/Process Temperature goes beyond Load Rate 1 setpoint offset then Load Rate 1
timer is used to make periodic sequencing decisions.
Load Rate 2 (Outer):
• If Suction Pressure/Process Temperature surpasses
Load Rate 1 offset and goes beyond Load Rate 2 setpoint offset then Load Rate 2 timer is used to make
periodic sequencing decisions.
Unload Rate 1 (Inner):
Capacity Load/Unload Timers
One of the following Capacity Load/Unload rate timers are used to make sequencing decisions periodically.
Suction Pressure/Process Temperature setpoints are
monitored to identify which one of the following timers
to be used.
• If Suction Pressure/Process Temperature goes below
Unload Rate 1 setpoint offset then Unload Rate 1
timer is used to make periodic sequencing decisions.
Unload Rate 2 (Outer):
• If Suction Pressure/Process Temperature surpasses
Unload Rate 1 offset and goes below Unload Rate 2
setpoint offset then Unload Rate 2 timer is used to
make periodic sequencing decisions.
Figure 10-2. Compressor Sequencing Screen - Page 2
10 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 10 • Compressor Sequencing
Compressor Sequencing Table
Compressor sequencing table menu allows operator to
view and adjust settings those are used for compressor
sequencing, see Figure 10-3.
NOTE
Switching a compressor control to OFF when running
in auto seq mode puts respective slave compressor
into local auto mode. This feature is used to add or
remove slave compressors to sequence table when
running in auto sequence mode.
CFM:
Equipment:
• Options of this combo box are updated automatically. This contains names of all the compressors in the
network communicating with Master compressor.
Equipment name can be selected from drop-down
list. Same Equipment name should not be configured
more than once in Sequencing table.
Control:
• Inclusion/exclusion of compressor partaking in the
sequencing can be decided on basis of this toggle
button. Compressors can be included/excluded by
toggling ON/OFF.
• CFM column is read only. These values are updated automatically when Equipment combo box is
changed. This indicates Slave compressor capacity in
CFM.
Priority:
• This defines priorities of compressors on the network.
This priority will decide the sequence in which compressors will be turned on and off during sequence
cycle. Lower the priority number greater the priority
of the compressor.
Figure 10-3. Compressor Sequencing Screen - Page 3
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
10 – 3
Section 10 • Compressor Sequencing
Step:
Machine Start Time:
• This parameter would decide stepwise increment or
decrement value in percentage of the compressor
capacity. In the case when last step makes total capacity greater than maximum capacity, total capacity will get reduced to maximum capacity. Same is
applicable when last step makes total capacity lower
than minimum capacity takes priority.
• Machine start timer shows the time in seconds that
the Master Compressor will hold before starting slave
compressor once (Start) decision is taken.
Min Cap:
• Defines the lowest capacity in percentage with which
a compressor is allowed to run. Minimum capacity
value takes preference on first step value.
Max Cap:
• Defines the highest capacity in percentage with
which a compressor is allowed to run. Maximum capacity value takes preference over last step value.
Status Symbols:
• Status symbols shows status of Slave compressors on
the sequencing table, see Table 10-1. Status Symbols.
For further details, see Application Notes.
Machine Stop Time:
• Machine Stop timer shows the time in sec that the
Master Compressor will hold before stopping slave
compressor once (Stop ) decision is taken.
Refresh:
NOTE
Before Configuring Sequencing table on Master
Compressor, log on to slave compressors one by
one and enable sequencing in slave mode, put slave
in remote mode. Then log on to Master Compressor
and wait till all slaves show up their names under
equipment List.
• Compressor Sequencing table is automatically refreshed every 1 minute. Pressing “Refresh” button
refreshes the status of the Compressor Sequencing
table on Master Compressor.
Table 10-1. Status Symbols
Symbol
Description
Slave Compressor is detected but is not configured
in the sequencing table.
Default, If slave Compressor is not present.
Slave Compressor is configured in sequencing table
but is not configured in “Remote” mode.
Slave Compressor configured in sequencing table
and is in ready to run state.
Slave Compressor is running with Alarm condition.
Slave Compressor stopped due to Error Condition.
Slave Compressor running at maximum capacity
without any error.
Slave Compressor under active control of Master
Compressor
Slave Compressor running into its stop timer, will be
stopped.
10 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 10 • Compressor Sequencing
Configuration Overview
COMPRESSOR SETUP FOR SLAVE COMPRESSOR
SEQUENCING
1.
Log onto each of the slave compressors one by one
and navigate to the Configuration screen (reference Screen1).
2.
Enable the ethernet port and select the Modbus
TCP protocol.
The Configuration screen allows the operator to;
3.
Enable the sequencing in slave mode.
• Enable / disable compressor sequencing.
4.
Setup a unique ethernet IP address for each slave.
• Select Slave / Master Mode of operation for the
compressor.
5.
Setup the subnet mask for the IP address.
6.
Setup the Gateway address (MUST DO!)
7.
Select a unique name for each slave compressor.
8.
Leave the panel ID at 1 for each compressor on the
sequencing network (all slaves and the master.)
9.
Set the Communications Active Remote Control
to “ETHERNET” for each compressor (slaves and
master).
NOTE
Slave Compressors should be configured first, then
configure the Master Compressor.
• Assign a unique compressor name.
• Enable Ethernet port.
• Select Modbus TCP protocol
• Assign a unique Ethernet IP address.
10. Apply these settings
Configuration screen.
before
exiting
the
Figure 10-4. Compressor Setup for Slave Compressor Sequencing
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
10 – 5
Section 10 • Compressor Sequencing
At this point the slave compressor will begin multicasting its status information over the network at a rate of
every 15 seconds. (After the Master Compressor is configured, the slave information will be populated to the
Sequencing menu of the Master Compressor.)
11. Exit out of the configuration screen and then
put slave in remote mode by pressing Unit
Start->Remote.
Figure 10-5. Placing Slave Compressors in Remote Mode
10 – 6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 10 • Compressor Sequencing
COMPRESSOR SETUP FOR MASTER COMPRESSOR
SEQUENCING
NOTE
The master compressor will ALWAYS be priority#1
compressor – and act as the trim compressor. So this
must be taken into account when deciding which
compressor is to act as the master compressor.
1.
Log onto the master compressor and navigate to
the Configuration screen (see Figure 10-6).
2.
Enable the Compressor Sequencing check box and
select “Master”.
3.
Enable the Ethernet port and select the Modbus
TCP protocol.
4.
Setup a unique Ethernet IP address for the master.
5.
Select a unique name for the master compressor.
6.
Setup the subnet mask for the IP address.
7.
Setup the Gateway address (MUST DO!)
8.
Select a unique name for the master compressor.
9.
Leave the panel ID at 1.
10. Set the Communications Active Remote Control to
“ETHERNET”.
11. Apply these settings before exiting
Configuration screen (see Figure 10-6) .
the
At this point, the master will begin receiving the slave
compressor information from the network and will
populate the “Equipment” column of the Compressor
Sequencing screen of the master compressor. If after a
couple of minutes if you do not see the slave compressors listed under the Equipment list, then power cycle
the master compressor panel.
Figure 10-6. Compressor Setup for Master Compressor Sequencing
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
10 – 7
10 – 8 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 11 • Condenser Control
Overview
Condenser Control Setpoint:
This screen allows the operator to view and adjust condenser setpoint settings associated with condenser operation. This screen will only be active if the Condenser
Control option has been enabled from the Configuration
Screen, see Figure 11-1.
Run Mode:
The Condenser Control operation allows the cycling of
fans and pumps in order to maintain a specific condensing pressure. The five different steps in step control allow selection of fans, pumps and VFD in one or more
steps. When a VFD is employed, VFD is allowed to reach
maximum speed, if additional capacity is needed, the
next fan or pump is turned on. The VFD will modulate
down and then once it is back up to 100% again, then
the next fan or pump is turned on. This method allows
the smoothest condenser control by spacing the VFD
between the fan and pump steps, while maintaining a
condenser pressure that matches the setpoint.
• Run Mode allows the selection of different modes of
operation for condenser control. The choices for selection are:
Run Never
• The mode of operation by default. Condenser Control
operation will not be performed when this mode is
active.
Run With Comp
• Automatic operation of condenser control selected
when control of the condenser is required to only run
when the compressor is running.
Run Always
• Automatic operation of condenser control selected
when control of the condenser is required to run even
when the compressor is off.
Figure 11-1. Condenser Control Screen - Page 1
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
11 – 1
Section 11 • Condenser Control
Manual:
High to Low Speed Fan Delay:
• Mode for controlling condenser control operation
manually. Operator controls the operation by manual
stepping using an on/off toggle button at each step.
• This is a time delay for the fan spin down in case of
2- speed motor/dual speed fan.
Condenser Press:
• This is the condenser pressure setpoint that needs to
be maintained.
• This checkbox when enabled allows profiles to switch
automatically depending on ambient temperature
setpoint when Run Mode is “Auto”. When ambient
temperature falls below ambient temperature setpoint, winter profile is used. Similarly when ambient
temperature is above ambient temperature setpoint,
summer profile is used.
Upper Deadband:
Wetbulb Override:
• This is the condenser pressure setpoint upper deadband value. No additional condenser capacity is added when the condenser is selected for automatic step
control and the condenser pressure falls within this
deadband.
• This checkbox when enabled gives the operator a
functionality to control energy wastage. When the
condenser temperature reaches wetbulb temperature plus the operator given offset, then the condenser control operation does not add additional
steps. This is done as it is not possible to lower the
temperature anymore, and by adding more fans or
pumps controls the operation by manually stepping
using an on/off toggle button at each step.
• This is the read only parameter and it displays the
present value of condenser pressure.
Condenser Setpoint:
Lower Deadband:
• This is the condenser pressure setpoint lower deadband value. Condenser capacity is not reduced
when the condenser is selected for automatic step
control and the condenser pressure falls within this
deadband.
Ambient Temp:
• This is the read only parameter and it displays the
present value of ambient temperature. This is displayed only when Ambient Sensor is enabled from
Configuration Screen.
Wetbulb Temp:
• This is the read only parameter and it displays the
present value of wetbulb temperature. This is displayed only when Wetbulb Sensor is enabled from
Configuration Screen.
Wetbulb Offset:
• This is the offset value from wetbulb temperature as
the override point.
Summer/Winter Auto Switch:
Step Control
The Step Control allows the operator to setup the manner in which Fans, Pumps & VFD will be turned on/off.
Fans & Pumps are connected on digital outputs Out #1
to Out #4. VFD Fan is connected on Analog Output. Each
step can have maximum of five outputs connected to it.
Each step can be opted in or out depending on enabling
of checkbox.
When Run Mode is Auto and condenser pressure rises
above upper deadband, the condenser step increments
from Step 1 up to Step 5 and hence switching on/off
Pumps, Fans & VFD connected on outputs. This holds
true for decrementing of steps from Step 5 to Step 1
when condenser pressure falls below lower deadband.
Switch Temp:
• This is the ambient temperature setpoint used for automatic switching of profile from summer to winter
and vice-versa.
Profile Selection:
• Profile selection allows operator to have two different
output profiles for summer and winter. Operator can
have different selection of fans, pumps & VFD in five
steps of step control table. Different profiles allow
inclusion/exclusion of water pumps in cold weather
when summer/winter auto switch is enabled. This
selection is inactive when Run mode is Auto and
Summer/Winter Auto Switch is enabled.
11 – 2
Step Delay:
• Allows operator to set time delays between condenser steps. Condenser Pressure must be outside upper
or lower deadband continuously for delay time in order to increase or decrease condenser steps. While
in a VFD step, an additional step can only be added
once VFD has reached its maximum speed setpoint
and the delay timers are satisfied.
• Similarly in a VFD step, a step can only be removed
once VFD has reached its minimum speed setpoint
and the delay timers are satisfied. Step Delay acts
as “ON” timer while loading and acts as “OFF” timer
while unloading for the same step.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 11 • Condenser Control
Low Speed Fan:
• Allows steps to have option for time delay in case of
fan spin down. Any of Out #1 to Out #4 can be selected as Low Speed Fan through combo box. E.g.:
Let’s say Out #2 is selected as Low Speed Fan in Step
2. When step 2 becomes active during condenser
control operation which is after Step 2 time-out delay, Out #2 is left off for time as set by the operator in
High to Low Speed Delay. After low speed fan energizes, then timer for Step 3 starts timing.
Control:
• Toggle any of the steps On/Off during Manual operation of Condenser Control. This button is active only
when Run Mode selected is Manual. During Auto operation of Condenser Control, control button for active step will be “ON”.
for continuous step delay time to increase condenser steps. E.g. let’s say setpoint is kept at 95%. Then
condenser VFD fan will have to run at speed of 95%
or more to advance to next step. Maximum Speed
can be set as 100%, which is when analog output (at
which condenser VFD fan is connected) reaches to
20mA in its normal range of 4-20 mA
Minimum Speed:
• This setpoint defines the minimum speed in percentage for Condenser VFD Fan at which it should run for
continuous step delay time to decrease condenser
steps. E.g. let’s say setpoint is kept at 5%. Then condenser VFD fan will have to run at speed 5% or less to
advance to next step. Minimum Speed can be set as
0%, which is when analog output (at which condenser VFD fan is connected) reaches 4mA in its normal
range of 4-20 mA.
VFD Settings
This page is active only when Condenser VFD is selected
in the Configuration Screen, see Section 19. For VFD
controls refer to Figure 11-2. When a VFD Fan is used
for condenser control operation, the speed of the VFD is
controlled using PID algorithm.
P = Proportional (gain):
• Used to adjust the fan speed action in direct proportion to the difference between the control setpoint
and the process variable (SP - PV = error). The proportional term is a unit less quantity and is used for
coarse adjustment. This setpoint should be set to the
lowest value that gives adequate control system response. Increasing the proportional setting increases
the control system’s sensitivity to small process fluctuations and the tendency to hunt.
I = Integral (reset):
• Used to adjust the capacity control action, integrating the error over time, to account for a small error that has persisted for a long time. This quantity
is used for fine adjustment. This setpoint is used to
smooth out process variations. This setpoint should
be set high enough to prevent hunting but not too
high or it will cause control system overshoot.
D = Derivative (rate):
• Used to adjust the capacity control action, accounting for how fast the error is changing, positively or
negatively.
Maximum Speed:
• This setpoint defines the maximum speed in percentage for Condenser VFD Fan at which it should run
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
11 – 3
Section 11 • Condenser Control
Figure 11-2. Condenser Control Screen - Page 2
11 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 12 • Service Options
Overview
Reference Figure 12-1.
The Service Option screen allows the operator the ability
to force individual digital or analog outputs ON. This feature is used for diagnostic purposes during initial setup
and/or if the operator suspects an issue with the outputs. The buttons in this screen are not available while
the compressor is running .
Digital Outputs
Compressor Start:
• Activates the output assigned to the compressor motor starter. The output is connected to terminal 11
and is the 1st LED on card 1.
Oil Pump Start:
• Activates the output assigned to the oil pump. The
output is connected to terminal 12 and is the 2nd
LED down on card 1.
Capacity Increase Motor:
The digital output buttons are momentary toggle buttons. The output will be active while the operator has his
finger on the button. The output will deactivate when
the operators finger is removed. The operator can measure the output at the terminal block or view the output
by watching the LEDs located on the cards. For Digital
Output screens, see Figures 12-1, 12-2, 12-3 and 12-4.
• Activates the output assigned to the increase input
of the capacity actuator. The output is connected to
terminal 13 and is the 3rd LED down on card 1.
Capacity Decrease Motor:
• Activates the output assigned to the decrease input
of the capacity actuator. The output is connected to
terminal 14 and is the 4th LED down on card 1.
Figure 12-1. Service Options Screen - Digital Outputs (Page 1)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
12 – 1
Section 12 • Service Options
Volume Increase Motor:
Reference Figure 12-2.
• Activates the output assigned to the increase input
of the volume actuator. The output is connected to
terminal 15 and is the 5th LED down on card 1.
Slide Valve Setpoint # 1 (Economizer):
Volume Decrease Motor:
• Activates the output assigned to the decrease input
of the volume actuator. The output is connected to
terminal 16 and is the 6th LED down on card 1.
Oil Separator Heater
• Activates the output assigned to the oil separator
heater. The output is connected to terminal 17 and is
the 7th LED down on card 1.
Trip:
• Deactivates the output during a trip or inhibit condition. This is a reverse acting output. The output is
connected to terminal 18 and is the bottom LED on
card 1.
• Activates the output typically assigned to the economizer solenoid, but can be changed by the operator.
The output is connected to terminal 21 and is the 1st
LED on card 2.
Slide Valve Setpoint # 2 (Hot Gas Bypass):
• Activates the output typically assigned to the hot gas
bypass solenoid, but can be changed by the operator.
The output is connected to terminal 22 and is the 2nd
LED on card 2.
Alarm:
• Activates the output during an alarm condition. This
is a reverse acting output. The output is connected to
terminal 23 and is the 3rd LED on card 2.
Economizer Port # 2 :
• Activates the output typically assigned to the economizer solenoid. The output is connected to terminal
24 and is the 4th LED down on card 2.
Figure 12-2. Service Options Screen - Digital Outputs (Page 2)
12 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 12 • Service Options
Liquid Injection # 1:
Reference Figure 12-3 and Figure 12-4.
• Activates the output assigned to the liquid injection
solenoid. The output is connected on terminal 25
and is the 5th LED on card 2.
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step # 1:
Liquid Injection # 2:
• Activates the output assigned to the 1st step of the
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler. The output is connected to terminal 41 and is the 1st LED on card 4.
• Not currently used.
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step # 2:
Remote Enabled:
• Activates the output assigned to the 2nd step of the
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler. The output is connected to terminal 42 and is the 2nd LED down on
card 4.
• Activates the output assigned to notify a central control system of the Vission 20/20 run status. The output is connected to terminal 27 and is the 7th LED on
card 2.
Shunt Trip:
• Activates the output during a false start condition
and the emergency stop timer has expired. This output could be wired to a breaker with a shunt trip that
feeds power to a starter to force a shutdown. The
output is connected to terminal 28 and is the 8th LED
on card 2.
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step # 3:
• Activates the output assigned to the 3rd step of the
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler. The output is connected to terminal 43 and is the 3rd LED down on
card 4.
Figure 12-3. Service Options Screen - Digital Outputs (Page 3)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
12 – 3
Section 12 • Service Options
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler Step # 4:
• Activates the output assigned to the 4th step of the
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler. The output is connected to terminal 44 and is the 4th LED down on
card 4.
Figure 12-4. Service Options Screen - Digital Outputs for Remote Oil Cooler (Page 3)
12 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 12 • Service Options
Analog Outputs
The Analog Output (AO) selections allow the operator to
enter a desired value of the output then turn on the output, see Figure 12-5. The operator will have to measure
the output using meter capable of measuring a 4-20mA
signal.
Compressor VFD:
• Sets the analog output assigned to the Slide Value
position used to inform a central control system of
the capacity position. The output is connected to AO
#3 on card 10.
Liquid injection Motorized Valve:
• Sets the analog output assigned to the liquid injection motorized value position. The output is connected to AO #4 on card 10.
• Sets the analog output assigned to the compressor
VFD. The output is connected to AO #1 on card 10.
Condenser / Remote Oil Cooler VFD:
• Sets the analog output assigned to the Condenser /
Remote Oil Cooler VFD. The output is connected to
AO #2 on card 10.
% Slide Valve Position
Figure 12-5. Service Options Screen - Analog Outputs (Page 4)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
12 – 5
12 – 6 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 13 • Instruments Calibration
Overview
calibrated through the Vission 20/20.
The Instrument Calibration screen allows the operator
to define how the Vission 20/20 will interpret the signal
from any devices attached to the panel’s analog inputs.
The instrument calibration screen is organized up to six
pages. Each page is then divided into several left side
selected tabs. Each tab will be headed with an information bar labeled “I/O” that give the basic information
for that device. The “A/D bit Value” display box shows
the unmodified value read by the Vission 20/20 analog
to digital converters. This display box is not affected by
any changes to the calibrations settings. As long as a device is connected to the associated input; there will be
a value in this display box. The “Calibrated Value” display box shows the end result of the calibration process.
Therefore, any changes to the calibration setpoint will
effect what value is shown.
Pressure and Temperature Inputs
All instruments are calibrated using a two point linear
calibration process. Any device that has a non-linear response to environmental stimuli will not be able to be
The most commonly used instruments are temperature and pressure sensors. The first two pages of the
Instrument Calibration screen are dedicated to these
instruments; see Figures 13-1 and 13-2.
Each tab on these two pages is divided into two sections,
Device Calibration and Channel Calibration. The device
calibration section is where the operation parameters of
the instrument are defined. The channel calibration defines the type of signal sent by the instrument.
Default Devices:
• By selecting this option, the operator will have access
via a drop-down box of several common devices. The
devices are predefined and if one is selected, then all
the setpoints will be set for the operator.
Figure 13-1. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 1)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
13 – 1
Section 13 • Instruments Calibration
Motor Current
Custom Device:
• This option allows the operator to choose the minimum and maximum value of the instrument being
used.
Offset:
• Once the two point calibration is completed, it is not
uncommon for there to be a small error. By entering
the value of the error from the calibrated value and
the actual value into the adjustment entry box, that
error will be added/subtracted from the total offset.
The offset is applied to the calibrated value which
should correct the error.
Range:
• This option is available when the custom device option is chosen. Here the operator defines the signal
type and range transmitted by the instrument. The
operator can choose from several predefined ranges
in the drop-down box or enter a value.
The Vission 20/20 has two options for measuring motor
current. A 4-20mA signal transmitted from an external
device or a 0-5Amp AC current Transformer. The type
of device being used is selected in the Configuration
Screen, Motor Current Device in Section 19.
The motor current tab has the ability to calibrate both
measurement options through the 4-20mA scale and
current transformer ratio sections, see Figure 13-3.
Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 3).
However, the device type that is selected in the configuration screen will be the only section that will be available to the operator.
The calibration differs from all other calibration procedures in that the motor current must be calibrated while
the compressor is running at close to full load amps as
much as possible. In addition, the operator will need to
enter a value into the “Enter Desired Value” entry box
that is equal to the measured value in amps by a calibrating measurement device. After entering the measured
Figure 13-2. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 2)
13 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 13 • Instruments Calibration
value, the displayed motor current may still be off slightly. In this case reenter the desired value and the displayed
value should get progressively closer.
total error offset of entries from the “Enter
Desired Value” setpoint.
Current Transformer Ratio:
• Primary
4-20mA Scale:
• Defines the upper value of the current
transformer.
• 4mA:
• Not editable by the operator. Defines the
minimum value in amps represented by a 4ma
inputs.
• 20mA:
• Secondary:
• Not editable by the operator. Defines the
minimum value of the current transformer.
• Enter Desired Value:
• Defines the maximum value in amps represented by a 20ma inputs.
• Enter Desired Value:
• The operator enters the correct current value.
Each entry will recalculate the point-slope calculations of the current calibration.
• Total Error:
• Not editable by the operator. Displays the
• The operator enters the value of the correct current value. Each entry will recalculate
the point-slope calculations of the current
calibration.
• Total Error:
• Not editable by the operator. Displays the total error offset of entries from the “Enter Desired
Value” setpoint.
Figure 13-3. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 3)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
13 – 3
Section 13 • Instruments Calibration
Remote Capacity
Analog Inputs
The remote capacity input allows a system controller
such as the PLC to control the capacity position during
direct I/O control.
This section of the Calibration screen allows the operator to define the parameters of an installed auxiliary analog instrument. These instruments are usually not part
of a typical compressor setup but Vission 20/20 provides
a way for the operator to add additional capabilities. The
layout of this screen is typical to the pressure and temperature calibration screens. For Analog Inputs screens,
see Figures 13-4 and 13-5.
Control Input:
• This dropdown box is not used at this time.
Scale:
• Defines the minimum and maximum Capacity position between 0% & 100% for the 4-20ma input.
Offset:
• Used to correct any error in the capacity position. By
entering a value into the Adjustment entry box, that
value will be added to the total offset displayed in the
“total offset” entry box.
Device Calibration:
• These setpoints allow the operator to define what the
input from the auxiliary instrument means in terms
of units and range. If a temperature measuring instrument is connected, then the operator would select temperature from the Unit drop-down box then
set the maximum and minimum value for the scale.
Figure 13-4. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 4)
13 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 13 • Instruments Calibration
Offset:
Range:
• Once the two-point calibration is completed, it is not
uncommon for there to be a small error. By entering
the value of the error from the calibrated value and
the actual value into the adjustment entry box, that
error will be added/subtracted from the total offset.
The offset is applied to the calibrated value which
should correct the error.
• Here the operator defines the signal type and range
transmitted by the instrument. The operator can
choose from several predefined ranges in the dropdown box or enter a value.
Figure 13-5. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 5)
Analog Outputs
The Analog output card of the Vission 20/20 generates
a 4–20mA signal to any attached devices. However, it is
not uncommon that small difference in the board components might result in small difference in the output.
So this screen offers the operator the ability to fine tune
the upper and lower output values, see Figure 13-6.
Test Limits:
• By pressing either the Test Min or Test Max buttons,
the output will go to either 4ma or 20 ma. The operator can then measure the output for accuracy.
Min (mA):
• If the 4ma output has an unacceptable amount of
error. The operator can use the “+” & “-” buttons to
adjust the output.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
13 – 5
Section 13 • Instruments Calibration
Max (mA):
Apply Changes:
• If the 20ma output has an unacceptable amount of
error. The operator can use the “+” & “-” buttons to
adjust the output
• Min (mA) and Max (mA) values are stored to database on press of this button. Offset (mA) value which
is used to correct 4mA or 20mA output is hence not
saved until this button is pressed.
Offset (mA):
• By entering the value of the error from the calibrated
value and the actual value into the offset entry box,
that error will be added/subtracted from the mA value. The offset is applied to the mA value which should
correct the error. Resolution of error should not be
less than 0.01.
Figure 13-6. Instruments Calibration Screen - Analog Outputs (Page 6)
13 – 6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 14 • Slide Calibration
Overview
this section displays the value of the actuator signals in
millivolts in the “input Value” display box.
The Slide Calibration screen is used in calibrating the
slide actuators and to establish Vission 20/20 control
parameters. It is important that the operator uses caution while operating in this screen, see Figure 14-1. The
normal safety checks that prevent the slide from colliding with the mechanical stops are overridden. When the
calibration process is completed and the operator exits
the screen, both actuators will return the slides back to
their minimum positions.
“-” Button:
Capacity Slide Valve Potentiometer
This section provides critical information and control parameters related to the capacity slide actuator. The “%
cap” display shows the actual value in percent of the capacity slide without any conditioning that might be applied to the other capacity position displays. In addition,
• When the operator presses and holds this button,
the output associated with capacity slide decrease
is energized. If the actuator does not turn in the correct direction when this button is pressed, then the
operator will have to alter how the actuator is wired
to the panel.
“+” Button:
• When the operator presses and holds this button,
the output associated with capacity slide increase is
energized. If the actuator does not turn in the correct direction when this button is pressed, then the
operator will have to alter how the actuator is wired
to the panel.
Software limit setpoint:
• The Vission 20/20 uses the “Min Limit” and
“Max Limit” setpoint to define an area within the
Figure 14-1. Slide Calibration Screen
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
14 – 1
Section 14 • Slide Calibration
mechanical stops for normal slide travel. These software limits purpose is to prevent the slide from actually hitting the mechanical stops which could result
in a number of undesirable consequences. By default,
the software limits are set to 150mV from either end
point. The position percentage is calculated from the
software limits. Therefore, it is possible to read a value greater than 100% or less than 0% if inertial carries
the slides after these limits are reached.
Volume Slide Valve Potentiometer
This section provided critical information and control
parameters related to the volume slide actuator. The
“% Vol” display shows the actual value in percent of the
volume slide without any conditioning that might be applied to the other volume position displays. In addition,
this section displays the value of the actuator signals in
millivolts in the “input Value” display box.
“-” Button:
• When the operator presses and holds this button,
the output associated with volume slide decreases
is energized. If the actuator does not turn in the correct direction when this button is pressed, then the
operator will have to alter how the actuator is wired
to the panel.
“+” Button:
• When the operator presses and holds this button,
the output associated with volume slide increase is
energized. If the actuator does not turn in the correct direction when this button is pressed, then the
operator will have to alter how the actuator is wired
to the panel.
Slide Valve Operation
The slide valve actuator is a gear-motor with a position
sensor. The motor is powered in the forward and reverse
directions from the main computer in the control panel.
The position sensor tells the main computer the position
of the slide valve. The main computer uses the position
and process information to decide where to move the
slide valve next.
During calibration, the position sensor records the high
and low count of motor turns. The operator tells the
position sensor when the actuator is at the high or low
position with the push button. Refer to the calibration
instructions for the detailed calibration procedure.
The position sensor can get “lost” if the motor is moved
while the position sensor is not powered. To prevent
this, the motor can only be moved electrically while
the position sensor is powered. When the position sensor loses power, power is cut to the motor. A capacitor stores enough energy to keep the position sensor
circuitry alive long enough for the motor to come to a
complete stop and then save the motor position to nonvolatile EEPROM memory. When power is restored, the
saved motor position is read from EEPROM memory and
the actuators resumes normal function This scheme is
not foolproof. If the motor is moved manually while the
power is off or the motor brake has failed, allowing the
motor to free wheel for too long after the position sensor
loses power, the actuator will lose its calibrated position.
A brake failure can sometimes be detected by the position sensor. If the motor never stops turning after a
power loss, the position sensor detects this, knows it will
be lost, and goes immediately into calibrate mode when
power is restored.
Software limit setpoint:
• The Vission 20/20 uses the “Min Limit” and “Max
Limit” setpoint to define an area within the mechanical stops for normal slide travel. These software limits
purpose is to prevent the slide from actually hitting
the mechanical stops which could result in a number
of undesirable consequences. By default, the software limits are set to 150mV from either end point.
The position percentage is calculated from the software limits. Therefore It is possible to read a value
greater than 100% or less than 0% if inertial carries
the slides after these limits are reached.
14 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 14 • Slide Calibration
Calibrate Slide Valve Actuators
Assuming that the actuator motors have not been calibrated, the transmitter output of the actuator motor
will fluctuate wildly until they are calibrated. To prevent
damage to actuator motors, do not connect the Power
Cable (Yellow TURCK cable) or the Position Transmitter
Cable (Gray TURCK cable) until instructed to do so in this
procedure.
1.
Open the plastic cover of the capacity motor by
removing four screws. Gently lift the cover and tilt
it toward the TURCK connectors. Raise the cover
enough to be able to press the blue calibrate button and to be able to see the red LED on the top of
the assembly, see Figure 14-2.
2.
Log into the Vission 20/20.
3.
From the main screen select the Menu button, and
then the Slide Calibration button, see Figure 14-3.
4.
When the “Slide Calibration” screen appears, then
you can safely connect the Power Cable (Yellow
TURCK cable) and the Position Transmitter Cable
(Gray TURCK cable) to the Capacity motor.
5.
Press “+” or “-” to move the slide valves to check
the rotation, see Table 14-1 for proper shaft rotation. If for any reason the “+” or “-” command on
the panel does not correspond to the slide increase
or decrease, swap the blue & brown wires of the
Yellow TURCK cable in the control panel to reverse
the rotation of the motor.
CAUTION
DO NOT CONTINUE TO ENERGIZE THE ACTUATOR
MOTOR AFTER THE SLIDE HAS REACHED THE
MECHANICAL STOP. Doing so may cause mechanical
damage to the motor or shear the motor shaft key.
When the slide has reached the mechanical stop
position, press the button in the center of the photochopper to release the brake, and thereby release the
tension on the actuator motor.
6.
Quickly press and release the BLUE CALIBRATION
BUTTON on the ACTUATOR motor once, see Figure
14-4. This instructs the ACTUATOR motor to enter
the calibration mode. The red LED on the actuator
control board will begin flashing. Use the “-” button on the Vission 20/20 panel to drive the capacity
slide to its minimum mechanical stop position.
This will be apparent by a slowing of the motor rotation and a winding sound from the actuator motor.
When you hear the motor wind-up, release the “-”
button.
Then use the “+” button to pulse the motor so that
the capacity slide is “just off” of its minimum position and there is no tension on the motor shaft.
7.
Quickly press and release the BLUE CALIBRATION
BUTTON on the ACTUATOR motor once. The red
LED will now flash at a slower rate. This now instructs the ACTUATOR motor that this point is the
minimum slide position. This point will correspond
to 0 volts AFTER the ACTUATOR calibration procedure is completed.
View Rotate 180°
Actuator
Assembly
Actuator
Plastic Cover
Red LED
Blue
Calibrate
Button
Figure 14-2. Actuator Assembly
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
14 – 3
Section 14 • Slide Calibration
Figure 14-3. Menu Screen and Slide Calibration Button (Vission 20/20)
14 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 14 • Slide Calibration
8. Use the “+” button on the Vission 20/20 to drive the
capacity slide to its maximum mechanical stop position.
This will be apparent by a slowing of the motor rotation
and a winding sound from the actuator motor. When
you hear the motor wind-up, release the “+” button.
9. Quickly press and release the BLUE CALIBRATION
BUTTON on the ACTUATOR motor once. The RED LED
will stop flashing. This now instructs the ACTUATOR motor that this point is the maximum slide position. This
point corresponds to 5 volts. The ACTUATOR calibration
procedure is completed.
Now the Capacity Channel is automatically calibrated
based on the calibration settings made to the actuator.
CAUTION
Do not over tigten screws. Failure to comply may
result in damage to equipment.
10. Gently lower the plastic cover to where it contacts
the base and O-ring seal. After making sure that the cover is not binding, gently tighten the four screws.
11. Repeat the same procedure for the Volume slide
motor.
Figure 14-4. Photo-chopper
Press down on Photo-chopper to release tension from motor mount.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
14 – 5
Section 14 • Slide Calibration
Command Shaft Rotation
The following table describes the rotation direction required by the actuator. Every optical actuator has the ability to
be wired to rotate in either direction. Energizing the blue actuator wire results in a CCW rotation and energizing the
brown wire results in a CW rotation, see Table 14-1. Command Shaft Rotation Required By Actuator.
Table 14-1. Command Shaft Rotation Required By Actuator
Compressor
Model
Command Shaft Rotation
Capacity
Number of Turns / Rotation Angle / Slide Travel
Volume
Capacity
Volume
INC
DEC
INC
DEC
Turns
Angle
Travel
Turns
Angle
Travel
VSR 111
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.91
328
3.568”
0.52
187
2.045”
VSR 151
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.91
328
3.568”
0.52
187
2.045”
VSR 221
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.91
328
3.568”
0.52
187
2.045”
VSR 301
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.91
328
3.568”
0.52
187
2.045”
VSS 451
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.91
328
3.568”
0.52
187
2.045”
VSS 601
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.91
328
3.568”
0.52
187
2.045”
VSS 751
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.09
392
4.283”
0.63
227
2.473”
VSS 901
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.09
392
4.283”
0.63
227
2.473”
VSS 1051
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.22
439
4.777”
0.74
266
2.889”
VSS 1201
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.22
439
4.777”
0.74
266
2.889”
VSS 1301
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.22
439
4.777”
0.74
266
2.889”
VSS 1501
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.36
490
5.325”
0.82
295
3.200”
VSS 1551
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.48
533
5.823”
0.87
313
3.433”
VSS 1801
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.36
490
5.325”
0.82
295
3.200”
VSS 1851
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.48
533
5.823”
0.87
313
3.433”
VSS 2101
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.48
533
5.823”
0.87
313
3.433”
VSS 2401
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.80
648
7.072”
1.36
490
5.341”
VSS 2601
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.80
648
7.072”
1.36
490
5.341”
VSS 2801
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.80
648
7.072”
1.36
490
5.341”
VSS 3001
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
1.80
648
7.072”
1.36
490
5.341”
VSM 71
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.80
288
3.141”
0.45
162
1.767”
VSM 91
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.80
288
3.141”
0.45
162
1.767”
VSM 101
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.80
288
3.141”
0.45
162
1.767”
VSM 151
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.80
288
3.141”
0.45
162
1.767”
VSM 181
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.80
288
3.141”
0.45
162
1.767”
VSM 201
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.80
288
3.141”
0.45
162
1.767”
VSM 301
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.80
288
3.141”
0.45
162
1.767”
VSM 361
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.80
288
3.141”
0.45
162
1.767”
VSM 401
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
0.80
288
3.141”
0.45
162
1.767”
VSM 501
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
0.91
328
3.568”
0.52
187
2.045”
VSM 601
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
0.91
328
3.568”
0.52
187
2.045”
VSM 701
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
0.91
328
3.568”
0.52
187
2.045”
14 – 6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 14 • Slide Calibration
Slide Valve Troubleshooting Guide
The Analog output card of the Vission 20/20 produces a 4–20mA signal to any attached devices. However, it is not
uncommon that small differences in the board components might result in small differences in the output. So this
screen offers the operator the ability to fine tune the upper and lower output values, see Table 14-2. Slide Valve
Troubleshooting Guide.
Table 14-2. Slide Valve Troubleshooting Guide (1 of 2)
Problem
Reason
Solution
Dirt or debris is blocking one or both Clean the optocoupler slots with a
optocoupler slots.
cotton swab and rubbing alcohol.
The photo-chopper fence extends
less than about half way into the
optocoupler slots.
Adjust the photo-chopper so that
the fence extends further into the
optocoupler slots. Make sure the
motor brake operates freely and
the photo-chopper will not contact
the optocouplers when the shaft is
pressed down.
The white calibrate wire in the grey
Turck cable is grounded.
Tape the end of the white wire in the
panel and make sure that it cannot
touch metal.
Dirt and/or condensation on the
position sensor boards are causing it
to malfunction.
Clean the boards with an electronics
cleaner or compressed air.
The calibrate button is stuck down.
Try to free the stuck button.
The position sensor has failed.
Replace the actuator.
Push button is being held down for
more that ¾ second when going
through the calibration procedure.
Depress the button quickly and then
let go. Each ¾ second the button is
held down counts as another press.
The white calibrate wire in the
grey Turck cable is grounding
intermittently.
Tape the end of the white wire in the
panel and make sure that it cannot
touch metal.
The actuator cannot be calibrated.
The actuator goes into calibration
mode spontaneously.
A very strong source of electromagnetic interference (EMI), such as a
contactor, is in the vicinity of the
actuator or grey cable.
The actuator does not transmit the
correct position after a power loss.
There is a rapid clicking noise when
the motor is operating.
Increase the distance between the
EMI source and the actuator.
Install additional metal shielding material between the EMI source and
the actuator or cable.
The motor was manually moved
while the position sensor was not
powered.
Recalibrate.
The motor brake is not working
properly.
Get the motor brake to where it operates freely and then recalibrate.
The position sensor’s EEPROM
memory has failed.
Replace the actuator.
The photo-chopper is misaligned
with the slotted optocouplers.
Try to realign or replace the actuator.
The motor brake is not working
properly.
Get the motor brake to where it operates freely and then recalibrate.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
14 – 7
Section 14 • Slide Calibration
Table 14-2. Slide Valve Troubleshooting Guide (2 of 2)
Problem
There is a rapid clicking noise when
the motor is operating. (Continued)
There is a rapid clicking noise when
the motor is operating.
The motor operates in one direction
only.
The motor will not move in either
direction.
The motor runs intermittently, several minutes on, several minutes off.
The motor runs sporadically.
The motor runs but output shaft will
not turn.
14 – 8
Reason
Solution
The position sensor’s EEPROM
memory has failed.
Replace the actuator.
The photo-chopper is misaligned
with the slotted optocouplers.
Try to realign or replace the actuator.
Adjust the photo-chopper so that
The photo-chopper is positioned too
the fence extends further into the
low on the motor shaft.
optocoupler slots.
A motor bearing has failed.
Replace the actuator.
There is a loose connection in the
screw terminal blocks.
Tighten.
There is a loose or dirty connection
in the yellow Turck cable.
Clean and tighten.
The position sensor has failed.
Replace the actuator.
There is a broken motor lead or
winding.
Replace the actuator.
The thermal switch has tripped because the motor is overheated.
The motor will resume operation
when it cools. This could be caused
by a malfunctioning control panel.
Consult the factory.
Any of the reasons listed in “The moSee above.
tor operates in one direction only”.
The command shaft is jammed.
Free the command shaft.
Broken gears in the gear-motor.
Replace the actuator.
Blown relays or fuses.
Check and replace blown relays and/
or fuses.
Motor is overheating and the thermal switch is tripping.
This could be caused by a malfunctioning control panel. Consult the
factory.
Bad thermal switch.
Replace the actuator.
Any of the reasons listed in “The moSee above.
tor will not move in either direction”.
Stripped gears inside the gear rotor,
or the armature has come unpressed Replace the actuator.
from the armature shaft.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 14 • Slide Calibration
Slide Valve Actuator Troubleshooting Guide Blink Code
Vilter actuators communicate problems discovered by the internal diagnostics to the technician by LED blink codes.
Only one blink code is displayed, even though it is possible that more than one problem has been detected. The actuator motor will not operate until the error code is cleared by pressing the blue bottom, see Table 14-3. LED Blink Codes
and Troubleshooting Guide.
Table 14-3. LED Blink Codes and Troubleshooting Guide (1 of 2)
Flash Pattern
* = ON
Meaning
- = OFF
*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-**---*---*---*---*---*---
Calibration step 1.
Calibration step 2.
This indicates a zero span. This error can only occur during calibration. The typical cause is forgetting to move
the actuator when setting the upper limit of the span.
If this is the case, press the blue button to restart the
calibration procedure. This error can also occur if either
or both of the slotted optocouplers are not working. If
this is the case, the slide valve actuator will have to be
replaced.
*--*--------------------
The operation of the slotted optocouplers can be tested
as follows:
1. Manually rotate the motor shaft until the aluminum
photo-chopper fence is not blocking either of the optocoupler slots.
2. Using a digital multimeter, measure the DC voltage
between terminal 3 of the small terminal block and TP1
on the circuit board (see Note 1). The measurement
should be between 0.1 and 0.2 Volts.
3. Next, measure the DC voltage between terminal 3
and TP2 on the circuit board. You should measure between 0.1 and 0.2 Volts.
*-----------------------
A motor over-speed occurred. At some time during
operation, the motor armature spun too fast for the
encoder to measure. A nonfunctional motor brake is
usually to blame. This error means that the slide valve
actuator is no longer transmitting accurate position
information. The actuator should be recalibrated as
soon as possible, after the cause of the over-speed is
identified and corrected. This error will not clear until
the actuator is re-calibrated.
Note 1: TP1 and TP2 are plated-thru holes located close to the slotted optocouplers on the board. They are clearly
marked on the board silkscreen legend.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
14 – 9
Section 14 • Slide Calibration
Table 14-3. LED Blink Codes and Troubleshooting Guide (2 of 2)
Flash Pattern
* = ON
Meaning
- = OFF
The motor is overheated. The actuator motor will not
run until it cools. Once the motor cools, the actuator will
resume normal operation.
*--*--*-----------------
Motor overheating is sometimes a problem in hot
humid environments when process conditions demand
that the slide valve actuators reposition often. Solutions
are available; consult your Vilter authorized distributor
for details.
Another possible cause for this error is a stuck motor
thermal switch. The thermal switch can be tested by
measuring the DC voltage with a digital multimeter between the two TS1 wire pads (see Note 2). If the switch
is closed (normal operation) you will measure 0 Volts.
The 24V supply voltage is low. This will occur momentarily when the actuator is powered up and on power
down.
*********************
If the problem persists, measure the voltage using a
digital multimeter between terminals 3 and 4 of the
small terminal block. If the voltage is less than 24V, the
problem is in the supply to the board.
If the voltage is >= 24V, replace the actuator..
-********************
*****----*--------------
The EEPROM data is bad. This is usually caused by loss of
24V power before the calibration procedure was completed. The actuator will not move while this error code
is being displayed. To clear the error, calibrate the actuator. If this error has occurred and the cause was not loss
of 24V power during calibration, the EEPROM memory
is bad and the actuator will need to be replaced.
Microcontroller program failure. Please notify your
Vilter authorized distributor.
Note 2: The TS1 wire pads are where the motor thermal switch leads solder into the circuit board. They are clearly
marked on the board silkscreen legend and are oriented at a 45° angle.
14 – 10
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 15 • Trend Chart
Overview
Chart Operation
This screen allows the operator to view and adjust settings for the trend chart, see Figure 15-1. Trend Chart
Screen. Trending feature can be started & stopped from
this screen. Up to four variables can be selected for plotting on screen. Each variable is assigned one of four
colors; the plotted trace and the vertical axis labels for
a variable will be in its assigned color. The operator can
select from viewing the plot to selecting which variables
and time intervals to show as often as necessary. The
vertical axis scaling and offset for each variable plotted
is based on its range of values over the entire data plotted on screen. The data available for display is 120 hours
maximum.
Pen Selection:
• Pen selection allows operator to select different pens
for plotting of data on the screen. The operator can
select “None” as an option for disabling plotting of
data for particular pen. Options in pen selection
drop-down box will depend on channels selected in
Trend Setup screen.
Start/Stop:
• This button allows the operator to start/stop trend
feature. When trend feature is not running, button
will display “Start” and will be green in color. While
trend feature is running, button will display “Stop”
and will be red in color. When “Stop” button is
pressed, trend data is saved to a file.
Zoom In/Out:
• These buttons allow the operator to adjust the number of data points plotted on the screen. At maximum
Figure 15-1. Trend Chart Screen
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
15 – 1
Section 15 • Trend Chart
zoom level operator can view 3 minutes of trend data
and Zoom In button will be inactive. At minimum
zoom level operator can view full 120 hours of trend
data and Zoom Out button will be inactive.
Back/Forward:
• These buttons allow the operator to move the plot
and view trend data at different time intervals.
• Forward button will be inactive when the operator
is viewing the first data point plotted on the screen
(i.e. when time interval is displaying 0:00). Back button will be inactive when the operator is viewing the
last data point on the screen (i.e. when time interval
is displaying 120:00). At minimum zoom level, Back
& Forward buttons will be inactive.
Trace:
Trend Data Storage
The trend analysis screen shows recorded data for problem analysis or tuning improvements. A logging buffer
holds 5 minutes of data sampled at 10 second intervals.
When the logging buffer fills with 5 minutes of data, it
is automatically transferred to a temp csv file. A temp
trend file will hold up to 1MB of accumulated data.
When the temp file has accumulated 1MB of data, data
from temp file is written to new trend file and temp file
is overwritten with new data in logging buffer till next
1MB of data. When a total of 15MB of trend data is accumulated, and the logging buffer has filled with another
5 minutes of data to write, the file with the oldest trend
data is deleted.
• This button allows the operator to move a white cursor line across all four trend lines and receive a readout of all four variables at that point in time. When the
Trace button is pressed, cursor position is displayed
along with value of all four variables on the screen.
Hold:
• This button allows the operator to stop the data from
advancing on the display without stopping the trend
feature. When the Hold button in pressed, Hold Time
is displayed on the screen.
Trace Back( < ) / Forward ( > ):
• These buttons allow the operator to move a white
cursor line across trend lines and view trend data
value at that point. These buttons will only be active
when Trace button is pressed. When these buttons
are pressed, cursor is moved and trace position is updated on the screen.
Setup:
• This button allows operator to open the Trend Setup
screen. This button is inactive when the trend feature
is running.
15 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
Section 15 • Trend Chart
Setup
The operator can modify trending options through the
Trend Setup screen, see Figure 15-2. Trend Setup Screen.
Trend Setup screen can be accessed by pressing the
Setup button when the trending feature is not running. Trend Setup screen allows the operator to select
a maximum of 10 analog I/O channels for trending. The
operator can also set a path for trend data files from the
drop-down box in the setup screen. The USB will appear
as an option in drop-down box only when a USB drive is
mounted on the panel.
If there is no space available on the USB or when the USB
is unmounted from the panel and USB is selected for saving trend files, trend data files will be written to hard disk.
If the operator changes Press/Temp units from the configuration screen when running the trending feature,
then the background trending will stop.
Figure 15-2. Trend Setup Screen
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
15 – 3
15 – 4 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
Section 16 • Event List
Overview
Time:
This screen is designed to display compressor events in
chronological order. The information available on the
screen is valuable for understanding the operation of
the compressor and troubleshooting, see Figure 16-1.
This screen Is divided into four columns and can list up
to 128 separate events. The operator can download the
information on the event list through the Data Backup
Screen.
• Displays the time of the event in HH:MM:SS format.
Event Type:
• Displays the type of message for a particular listing.
Common type are “Start”, “Stop”, “Trip”, “Inhibit”,
“Alarm”, and “System”. These help the operator to
understand the meaning of the message in the next
column.
Message:
• Displays the informational string that describes the
event.
Event list Columns
Date:
• Displays the date of the event in MM-DD-YYYY
format.
Figure 16-1. Event List Screen
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
16 – 1
16 – 2 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 17 • Input / Output
Overview
This screen displays “Live Data” of all the analog points
and digital points being monitored. There are four
pages of Input / Outputs (I/O) available for viewing, see
Figures 17-1, 17-2, 17-3 , 17-4 and 17-5. This screen also
takes a snapshot of all the I/O points if the compressor
experiences a trip condition and saves this data as Freeze
pages, for example, see Figure 17-6. Up to five Freeze
pages can be saved. The oldest Freeze page will be removed when more than five Freeze events occur. These
Freeze events can be downloaded to a USB drive though
the Data Backup screen, see Section 20.
Figure 17-1. Input/Output Screen - Page 1
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
17 – 1
Section 17 • Input / Output
Figure 17-2. Input/Output Screen - Page 2
Figure 17-3. Input/Output Screen - Page 3
17 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 17 • Input / Output
Figure 17-4. Input/Output Screen - Page 4
Figure 17-5. Input/Output Screen - Page 4 (Remote Oil Cooler Enabled)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
17 – 3
Section 17 • Input / Output
Figure 17-6. Input/Output Screen - Freeze Data Page
17 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 18 • Auxiliary Input / Output
Overview
The Auxiliary Input/Output (I/O) section of the Vission
20/20 gives the operator flexibility to add peripheral
instruments and/or devices such as motors, valves and
solenoids. With these additions, customer configurable
I/Os are useful in expanding the functions of the Vission
20/20 where it was not explicitly designed to control.
Setting up one or more of the auxiliary inputs or outputs start with the configuration screen. In order to enable the auxiliary I/O, the Vission 20/20 must first be
equipped with one of the available expandable I/O cards
and the card must be selected on page 6 of the configuration screen. Once the appropriate card is available,
then the operator will be permitted to enable and name
the desired auxiliary I/O. The operator can then navigate
to the Auxiliary I/O screen where the operator can define
how that I/O will operate.
Digital Inputs
The Digital Inputs section of the auxiliary I/O allows
an operator to configure the auxiliary digital inputs,
see Figure 18-1. The digital input can be configured to
produce an alarm, a trip, and an inhibit on either a high
or low input. A low input is 0vac and a high is 120vac on
the enabled input. Leaving all options in their default setting will mean no action will be taken on an enable input.
The input will simply be available for viewing at the panel
or by communications.
Trip/Alarm Check:
• Selecting this checkbox enables the alarms and/or
trip functions of the Vission 20/20 for the desired
digital input. The accompanying drop-down box
gives the operator the flexibility to choose whether
the alarm and/or tip occurs if the input is high or low.
Inhibit Check:
• Selecting this checkbox enables the inhibit function
of the Vission 20/20 for the desired digital input. An
inhibit check prevents the compressor from starting
if the condition is true where a trip will shut down
the compressor after it as started. The inhibit can be
selected to inhibit on a high or low input and can be
selected to work with or without the alarm and trip
function
Figure 18-1. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Digital Inputs (Page 1)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
18 – 1
Section 18 • Auxiliary Input / Output
Digital Outputs
The digital outputs section of the Auxiliary I/O screen
allows an operator to configure the auxiliary digital
outputs, see Figure 18-2. The digital output can be configured to activate (go High, 120vac) based on either a
digital input or a specified level on an analog input. Every
digital and analog input in the Vission 20/20 are made
available for controlling a digital output.
• The digital relay option is used to pass along the information from a digital input to another control device or to operate a peripheral device. This output can
be configured to either reflect the selected input or
show the opposite value.
• Mirror:
• Selecting this option will produce a high output when the selected input is High; and produce a low output when the selected input is
low.
• Invert:
Analog Input:
• Selecting the Analog Input radio button fills the
Active Input drop-down box with all available analog
inputs. One of the analog inputs can then be selected
to control the digital outputs.
• Selecting this option will produce a low output when the selected input is high; and produce a High output when the selected input is
low.
Digital Input:
• Selecting the Digital Input radio button fills the
Active Input drop-down box with all available digital
inputs. One of the digital inputs can then be selected
to control the digital outputs.
Run Always:
• Selecting this checkbox enables the function that
controls the digital output to operate only when the
compressor is running or runs all the time.
Analog Trigger:
• The analog trigger toggles the digital output based
on a specified value plus the specified differential
value.
• Analog Trigger value:
• This defines the specified value in which the
output will toggle. This is an absolute value
and not based on units. For example, 100 could
mean temperature or pressure depending on
the type of input selected.
• N/O & N/C:
• Choosing the Normally Open (N/O) or
Normally Closed (N/C) radio buttons defines
what the output will be above or below the trigger value. In the N/O setting, the output will be
off (0vac) while the input value is below the trigger value.
• Differential:
• This is the differential around the trigger value. For example, if a trigger value of 100 is entered with a differential of 1, then as the value
increases to 101, the output will be triggered. If
the value decreases to 99, then the output will
be toggled in the opposite direction.
Analog Inputs
The Analog inputs section of the auxiliary I/O screen allows an operator to define the function of an instrument
connected to the Vission 20/20. For Auxiliary Analog
Inputs Screens, see Figure 18-3, 18-4 and 18-5. The analog inputs can be configured to simply monitor an input
for informational purposes or used as a control input for
the auxiliary digital and analog outputs. The analog inputs can also be configured to alarm, trip, and inhibit on
specified values.
• Alarm / Trip:
• This drop-down box allows the operator to
select whether the analog input should generate an alarm, trip, or both when the input value
exceeds the limits entered into the alarm and
trip entry boxes.
• Inhibit:
• Selecting this checkbox will prevent a start if
the input value exceeds the alarm limit values.
• Low Alarm:
• This defines the lower limit of the input value
that when exceeded will generate an alarm.
• High Alarm:
• This defines the upper limit of the input value,
that when exceeded will generate an alarm.
• Low Trip:
• Defines the lower limit of the input value that
when exceeded will generate a trip.
Digital Relay:
18 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
Section 18 • Auxiliary Input / Output
Figure 18-2. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Digital Outputs (Page 2)
Figure 18-3. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 3)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
18 – 3
Section 18 • Auxiliary Input / Output
tendency to hunt.
• High Trip:
• Defines the upper limit of the input value that
when exceeded will generate a trip.
Analog Outputs
This screen allows to map any standard analog input or
auxiliary input to any of the four analog auxiliary outputs. There are two pages of auxiliary output configuration; each consists of two analog auxiliary outputs. For
Auxiliary Outputs Screens, see Figures 18-6 and 18-7.
I = Integral (reset):
• Used to integrate the error over time, to account for
a small error that has persisted for a long time. This
quantity is used for fine adjustment. This setpoint is
used to smooth out process variations. This setpoint
should be set high enough to prevent hunting but
not too high or it will cause control system overshoot.
D = Derivative (rate):
• Used to account for how fast the error is changing,
positively or negatively.
• Active Input:
• Active Input can be selected from available standard analog inputs or auxiliary inputs.
Selected Active Input gets mapped to auxiliary
output.
• Run Always:
• “Run Always” option can be selected to enable mapped auxiliary output irrespective of the
compressor’s run state. If “Run Always” is not
selected then the mapped auxiliary output is
enabled only when compressor is running.
• Trigger:
• Trigger configuration is used to enable / disable auxiliary output according to the configured trigger input. Trigger input can be selected
from available standard analog inputs , auxiliary
analog inputs or digital inputs. Trigger value
and differential in combination with trigger
type (“enable if above / On” or “enable if below /
Off”) enables or disables auxiliary output.
Setpoint :
• Setpoint used by PID engine.
Inverse:
• This option is used to inverse Analog Aux Output
to vary output from 20 mA to 4 mA. Typically used
where normally open solenoids are to be operated.
Negative Error:
• Negative Error option is used when PID should be active only if negative error is present (Setpoint is greater than Process Variable).
Scalable Control:
• Minimum Input / Maximum Input:
• These setpoints defines minimum and maximum Input range for configured active input .
• Minimum Output / Maximum Output:
Control
Auxiliary outputs can be PID Controlled or Scalable
Controlled.
• These setpoints defines minimum and maximum output. The Auxiliary output produces a
linear value based on these settings.
PID Control:
P = Proportional (gain):
• Used to adjust the auxiliary output in direct proportion to the difference between the control setpoint
and the active input. The proportional term is a unit
less quantity and is used for coarse adjustment. This
setpoint should be set to the lowest value that gives
adequate control system response. Increasing the
proportional setting increases the control system’s
sensitivity to small process fluctuations and the
18 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
Section 18 • Auxiliary Input / Output
Figure 18-4. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 4)
Figure 18-5. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Analog Inputs (Page 5)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
18 – 5
Section 18 • Auxiliary Input / Output
Figure 18-6. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Analog Outputs (Page 6)
Figure 18-7. Auxiliary I/O Screen - Analog Outputs (Page 7)
18 – 6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
Section 19 • Configuration
Overview
Press Units:
The configuration screen is where most of the Vission
20/20 features are enabled and configured. The initial
setup of the Vission 20/20 will generally start here, see
Figure 19-1. Depending on what is selected, different
portions of the Vission 20/20 will be available to the
operator.
• Drop-down Box to select the pressure units. Psig, Bar,
and Kpa are the possible selections and the units will
be displayed for every pressure value throughout the
screens.
Order Num:
• Identifies the Order number of the purchase of the
compressor. This Number will be needed If the operator requires help from Vilter.
Run Hours:
Units
This section sets how values will be represented through
out the program.
Temp Units:
• Offers the ability to change the compressor run
hours. This is typically used when replacing an older
micro controller on and existing compressor with a
new Vission 20/20.
• Drop-down box to select the temperature units from
Fahrenheit and Celsius. Once selected, all screen
temperatures will be displayed in the chosen units.
Figure 19-1. Configuration Screen - Initial Setup (Page 1)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
19 – 1
Section 19 • Configuration
Time & Date
Serial (Modbus RTU):
This section sets the time and date of the Vission 20/20.
Accurate time and date are accentual for accurate logging and troubleshooting. Setting these parameters will
set the hardware clock embedded in the Vission 20/20
CPU. If the time is not retained after powering down the
panel, the operator should check and/or replace the coin
style battery on the panel SBC behind the touchscreen.
Format:
• Selection to choose between 12 hour or 24 hours
clock.
Hour:
• Entry box to set the clock hours. AM or PM drop-down
box will available if the 12 hour format is selected.
Minute:
• Enables the Serial Modbus RTU protocol. Once selected, the remainder of the serial setpoints will be
available for editing.
Panel ID:
• Panel Identifier used by the controller when communicating with multiple panels.
Port:
• The Vission 20/20 has two ways to communicate on
serial bus. Either via the built in serial port, P12, or
through one of the USB ports. This drop-down box
allows the operator to chose which one will be used.
Baud Rate:
• Sets the Baud Rate for the serial communication.
Data Bits:
• Fixed at 8 Data bits.
• Entry Box to set the clock minutes.
Stop Bits:
Second:
• Identifies the end of character for re-synchronizing.
• Entry Box to set the clock seconds.
Parity:
Year:
• Identifies the type of error detection.
• Entry Box to set the current year.
Ethernet:
Month:
Day:
• Enables the Ethernet port. Once selected, the remainder of the Ethernet setpoints will be available for
editing.
• Entry Box to set the current date.
Panel ID:
• Entry Box to set the current month.
• Panel Identifier used by the controller when communicating with multiple panels.
Communications
IP Address:
The communication section is the control center for all
communications to the Vission 20/20 panel. It is possible to have multiple modes of communications enabled
and used. However, only one mode can be used to control the Vission 20/20 which is selected in the “Active
Remote Control” drop-down box. For a complete list
of communication registers, please refer to the Vission
20/20 communication table.
Active Remote Control:
• Selects the mode of remote control. The operator
can select between Direct I/O, Serial, or Ethernet.
• Entry box to set the IP address.
Subnet Mask:
• Entry box to set the Subnet Mask.
Gateway:
• Entry box to set the Gateway address.
Protocol:
• Drop-down box to select the type of protocol used to
remotely control the Vission 20/20.
Touchscreen
Direct I/O:
• Enables the Direct I/O inputs. Once selected a pop-up
will be displayed and the operator will need to choose
a one of the three Direct I/O options
19 – 2
The “Calibrate” button changes the screen into touchscreen calibration mode. Calibrating the touchscreen
is only required if the operator finds that the pointer arrow no longer follows his finger. The calibration mode
requires the operator to touch the four corners of the
touchscreen and then the accept button.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
Section 19 • Configuration
Anti-Recycle
Compressor Sequencing
Anti-Recycle defines the method of motor protection
due to repeated motor starts. The operator has 3 choices
of protection. Hot starts allow only a certain number of
starts per hour before setting an hour to the anti-recycle timer. The number of starts is set in the timer page.
Accumulative immediately adds time to the anti-recycle
timer once the compressor is started and the time can
be set in the timers screen. True anti-recycle adds to the
anti-recycle timer once the compressor is shutdown. The
motor of the compressor can not be restarted as long as
there is anti-recycle time left and the operator can view
this time on the top left corner of the main screen.
The compressor sequencing is a feature of the Vission
20/20 that allows the operator to setup as many as five
compressors to automatically start, stop and maintain
system loads. The compressor designated as the master
will monitor system parameters and make decisions on
how many compressors are required to meet the load as
efficiently as possible.
Compressor Sequencing:
• Enables the compressor sequencing algorithms and
allows access to the compressor sequencing screen.
Master:
Restart On Power Failure
• Identifies the panel as the master while in sequencing
control.
This feature of the Vission 20/20 offers the ability to define how the Vission 20/20 will handle a power failure.
This can also be useful to allow system controller to regain control of the Vission panel without the need for
operator intervention.
Slave:
Always:
• Unique identifier that is broadcasted to all other
Vission 20/20 units in the sequencing network.
• When selected, initiates a start after the panel powers back up after a power failure, but only if the compressor was running before the power failure and
starts the compressor in Auto mode.
Never:
• When selected, prevents any automatic action once
the panel powers back up after a power failure.
Timed:
• When selected, initiates a start after the panel powers back up after a power failure and the operator set
timer runs out. When there are multiple compressors
in a larger system, it is recommended that the operator gives each compressor a different start times. A
restart will only occur if the compressor was running
before the power failure and starts the compressor in
Auto mode.
Remote Lock Off:
• When selected, turns the remote lock out off when
the panel powers up. Select this option if the operator wishes a system controller to regain control of the
Vission 20/20 without human interference.
• Identifies the panel as a slave while in sequencing
control.
Compressor Name:
Language
Allows the operator to select the language in which all
screens will be displayed in.
Model & Refrigerant
The values in this section provide the Vission 20/20 algorithm critical information on how to efficiently and safely
control the compressor, see Figure 19-2.
Compressor:
• Dropdown box to select the compressor type. This
selection is critical for proper volume slide control.
Model:
• Drop-down box to select the compressor size. This
selection is critical for proper volume slide control.
Boot in Remote (Direct I/O)
Refrigerant:
• When selected, places the panel into remote mode
when the panel powers up. Select this option when
under direct I/O control and the system controller is
to gain control of the Vission 20/20 without human
interference.
• Drop-down box to select the type of refrigerant. This
selection is critical for proper volume slide control.
Other (K-Factor):
• Optional setting to adjust volume slide control.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
19 – 3
Section 19 • Configuration
Compressor Control
Optional Function Selection
Vilter compressors typically run in one of two control
modes, suction pressure or process temperature control, see Figure 19-2.
The following options are additional features of the
Vission 20/20 that can be selected. Some of these options will not be available for selection unless the proper
I/O cards are installed and enabled, see Figure 19-2.
Suction Pressure Control:
• This defines the suction pressure input as the process variable and all controls will be based on suction
pressure. The operator has the option to select up to
two controllers where each can have its own set of
setpoints.
Compressor VFD:
Process Temp. Control:
Economizer Pressure:
• This defines the process temperature input as the
process variable and all controls will be based on the
process temperature. The operator has the option to
select up to two controllers where each can have its
own set of setpoints.
• Enables the economizer pressure input.
• Enables the compressor motor VFD option.
% Slide Volume Position:
• Unused.
Suction Superheat Monitor:
• Enables the suction superheat safety algorithms.
Suction superheat monitor works only with R717 and
R507. Suction superheat monitor and Discharge superheat monitor features are mutually exclusive.
Figure 19-2. Configuration Screen - Compressor Control (Page 2)
19 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
Section 19 • Configuration
Discharge Superheat Monitor:
# Pumps:
• Enables the discharge superheat safety algorithms.
Discharge superheat monitor works only with R717.
Discharge superheat monitor and suction superheat
monitor features are mutually exclusive.
• Not currently used
Vilter Only Settings
Rapid Cycling VFD:
• Enables Rapid Cycling VFD Algorithm for controlling
Compressor VFD Analog Output.
Oil Flow Control:
• Enables option for oil flow control. Oil flow control
will vary analog output for controlling danfoss valve
opening % depending on capacity slide position. Oil
flow control output will be regulated only when compressor is running, start condition is over i.e. low oil
pressure timer is elapsed, pumpdown control operation is not running and oil injection temperature is
above oil injection temperature override setpoint. If
any of the above condition is not satisfied, then oil
flow analog output will be 4 mA which corresponds
to 100 % valve open.
Condenser Control
The set of values in this section enables the condenser
control feature of the Vission 20/20. Once selected the
checkboxes will become available for selection and the
condenser control screen will be available via the menu
screen. Some of the options check boxes in this section
may not be available for selection unless the proper I/O
cards are installed and enabled, see Figure 19-2.
Ambient Sensor:
• Enables the ambient temperature option for the condenser control algorithm.
Wetbulb Sensor:
• Enables the wetbulb temperature override option for
the condenser control algorithm.
VFD Fan:
• Enables the VFD output option for the condenser
control algorithm.
Oil Cooling
The section defines how the Vission 20/20 will monitor
and/or control the temperature of the compressor oil,
see Figure 19-2.
Thermosyphon:
• This defines the compressor oil cooling method as
thermosyphon.
H20 Oil Cooler:
• This defines the compressor oil cooling method as
water heat exchange.
Liquid Injection:
• This defines the compressor oil cooling method as
liquid refrigerant injection.
Solenoids:
• Enables the solenoid for liquid injection control.
Motorized Valve:
Oil Pump
• Enables the motorized value for liquid injection controlled by PID settings.
This section defines how the Vission 20/20 will control
the oil pump, see Figure 19-2.
Remote Oil Cooler:
No Pump:
• Disables all functions for oil pump control.
Cycling:
• Enables option for cycling oil pump. Oil pump is cycled on and off depending on compressor differential
pressure.
• Defines the compressor oil cooling method as
Remote Oil Cooler. Remote Oil Cooler VFD fan can
be enabled when Auxiliary Output board is installed
and enabled. Rest of the Remote Oil Cooler setpoints
can be defined by navigating to Remote Oil Cooler
Screen. Remote Oil Cooler and Condenser Control
feature are mutually exclusive.
Full Time:
• Enables option for full time oil pump. Oil pump will
always be running while the compressor is running.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
19 – 5
Section 19 • Configuration
Motor Current Device
The Vission 20/20 can read the motor current in a couple
of different ways. The following selections defines the
method, see Figure 19-2.
Current Transformer:
• This defines the input used for motor current when a
current transformer is used.
4-20ma Transformer:
• This defines the input used for motor current.
19 – 6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
Section 19 • Configuration
Digital Inputs
The Vission 20/20 has several digital inputs that the operator can choose how the input will be used. Once an
input is enabled, the Auxiliary I/O screen will be available
from the menu screen where the operator can further
define the inputs operation, see Figure 19-3.
Enable Input #:
• Enables the selected digital input.
Set Name:
• Allows the operator to assign a name to the input.
Figure 19-3. Configuration Screen - Digital Auxiliaries (Page 3)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
19 – 7
Section 19 • Configuration
Analog Inputs
The Vission 20/20 has several Analog inputs that the operator can choose how the input will be used. Once an
input is enabled, the Auxiliary I/O screen will be available
from the menu screen where the operator can further
define the inputs operation, see Figure 19-4.
Enable Input #:
• Enables the selected analog input.
Set Name:
• Allows the operator to assign a name to the input.
Figure 19-4. Configuration Screen - Analog Auxiliaries (Page 4)
19 – 8
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
Section 19 • Configuration
Analog Outputs
Digital Outputs
The Vission 20/20 has several Analog outputs that the
operator can choose how the outputs will be used. Once
an output is enabled, the Auxiliary I/O screen will be
available from the menu screen where the operator can
further define the outputs operation, see Figure 19-5.
The Vission 20/20 has several Digital outputs that the
operator can choose how the output will be used. Once
an output is enabled, the Auxiliary I/O screen will be
available from the menu screen where the operator can
further define the outputs operation, see Figure 19-5.
Enable Output #:
Enable Output #:
• Enables the selected analog output.
• Enables the selected digital output.
Set Name:
Set Name:
• Allows the operator to assign a name to the output.
• Allows the operator to assign a name to the output
Figure 19-5. Configuration Screen - Analog and Digital Outputs (Page 5)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
19 – 9
Section 19 • Configuration
I/O Configuration
Digital Input/Output 1:
• Enables the optional digital input/output card 1.
If any additional I/O card are added to Vission 20/20, this
is where these cards are enabled for use by the Vission
20/20 algorithms. Some feature of the Vission 20/20 will
not be available unless specific expansions cards are selected, see Figure 19-6.
Digital Input/Output 2:
Digital Output 1:
Analog Input 2:
• Not editable by the operator. Identifies that the
Digital Output card 1 is enabled.
• Not editable by the operator. Identifies that the
Analog Input card 2 is enabled.
Digital Output 2:
Analog Input 3:
• Not editable by the operator. Identifies that the
Digital Output card 2 is enabled.
• Enables the optional Analog input card 3.
Digital Input 1:
• Enables the optional Analog input card 4.
• Not editable by the operator. Identifies that the
Digital Input card 1 is enabled.
Analog Output:
• Enables the optional digital input/output card 2.
Analog Input 1:
• Not editable by the operator. Identifies that the
Analog Input card 1 is enabled.
Analog Input 4:
• Enables the optional Analog Output card.
Figure 19-6. Configuration Screen - I/O Configuration (Page 6)
19 – 10
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 1.9
Section 20 • Data Backup
Overview
Refresh:
The database backup screen provides the operator a way
to extract information out of the Vission 20/20 for backup purposes or diagnostics, see Figure 20-1. Through
this screen, the operator can download all the Setpoint
Databases, Maintenance Logs, Event Lists, Freeze Data,
Trend Data and Compressor Run Hours to a portable USB
flash drive. That information can then be uploaded back
to the Vission 20/20 in the case of data corruption or to
update the Vission program. Built in migrate function
examines the previous setpoint databases, compares it
with newer program setpoint database, and moves the
old information into the new program. In addition, this
screen also allows the operator to reset all values to the
factory defaults.
All of the information saved to the USB flash drive is
open information. Meaning none of the information is
encrypted and the operator is free to examine it. The log
files are all saved as simple ASCII text and the databases
can be examined with SQLite.
• The Refresh button is used to initiate a scan of the
USB ports and list any devices found in the “Available
Devices” window.
Save / Load
Save / Load section is where the operator can either save
the Vission 20/20 setpoints and log information to a
USB flash drive or load from a USB flash drive back to the
Vission 20/20.
Save:
• Selecting save allows the operator to save the Vission
20/20 data to a USB flash drive using the information
provided further down the screen. The bottom button will be labeled “Save” when this is selected.
Figure 20-1. Data Backup Screen - Save/Load
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
20 – 1
Section 20 • Data Backup
Load:
• Selecting load allows the operator to load data from
a USB flash drive to the Vission 20/20 using the information provided further down the screen. The
bottom button will be labeled “Load” when this is
selected.
Available Devices:
• This window displays any USB flash drive plugged
into one of the Vission 20/20 USB ports. Once one
of the available devices is selected, then the drives
contents will be displayed in the “Select Folder / File”
window. If the USB flash drive that is plugged in by
the operator is not showing up, then the operator
can try pressing the “Refresh” button at the bottom
of the screen. Unfortunately, not all USB flash drives
are compatible with the Vission 20/20 and will never
show up as available device.
Select Folder/File:
• This window displays the folders and files contained in
the USB flash drive selected in the “Available Devices”
window. The information from the Vission 20/20 will
be contained into a .zip file. So a zip file will have to
be selected to load or overwritten when saved. Once
a zip files is selected, the name will be shown in the
filename window.
Unmount:
• By pressing the Unmount button, any USB drive selected in the “Available Devices” window will be disconnected from the operating system and can be
safely removed from the USB port.
Back:
• The back button returns the operator to the preceding window display of files and folders.
Filename:
• This window is where the operator can give a name
to a saved backup file. This field will automatically be
populated if a file is selected in the “Select Folder/
File” window.
Settings:
• Using this table, the operator can choose to save or
load all or part of the information contained in the
Vission 20/20.
Data Items:
• Using this table, the operator can choose to save or
load all or part of the information contained in the
Vission 20/20 according to checkbox selections.
Save / Load Button:
• This button initiates the save or load process.
20 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 20 • Data Backup
Migrate
Factory Reset
Loading data from an older version of the Vission 20/20
software to a newer one can be complicated due to differences in databases. This migrate function closely
examines each field in the database being loaded and
determines whether it can be used in the new program.
The Migrate function is executed automatically when a
data is loaded from a USB flash drive. The only time an
operator should have to use the following migrate button is if a new Vission 20/20 program is loaded over an
existing Flash card, see Figure 20-2.
The Factory reset button offers the operator the ability
to reset all the Vission 20/20 setpoints back to the factory default settings or a specific database. If the operator
finds that a screen will not load when selected, it is likely
that the database associated with that screen has been
corrupted. Unfortunately, data corruption is always a
possibility in any system. So this function was designed
to help the operator to regain control, see Figure 20-2.
Reset:
Migrate:
• This button initiates the migrate function.
• This button initiates the process to revert the Vission
20/20 back to the factory default settings.
Figure 20-2. Data Backup Screen - Migrate and Factory Reset
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
20 – 3
Section 20 • Data Backup
Setpoints Report
All/ Select:
The setpoints report screen offers the operator the ability to generate setpoints report for all screens. The reports are stored as .csv files and can be saved to a USB
drive from Save/Load screen by selecting Setpoints
Report option in Data Items during backup of database.
.CSV file can be imported in any spread sheet application. During the course of operation, operator can generate reports any time, see Figure 20-3.
• Selecting “All” will include all screen in the report
that is generated. When “Select” is chosen, the operator can choice which screen will be included in the
report.
Generate:
• This button initiates the process to generate setpoints report files.
Figure 20-3. Data Backup Screen - Setpoints Report
20 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 21 • Maintenance
Overview
Maintenance Name:
The maintenance screen is a convenient place to keep
track of the maintenance performed and any upcoming maintenance recommended by Vilter. Based on this
page, banners will be displayed on the lower status bar.
Yellow banners are to warn the operator of any upcoming maintenance and red banners indicate maintenance
that is overdue.
• This column of tasks that should be performed at the
run hours indicated in Maintenance interval column.
Select the checkbox from the maintenance task name
and press “update” button to perform the sign-off.
Maintenance Interval (Hours):
• This column indicates the Run hours at which the task
in the first column should be performed. When a task
is selected, the maintenance interval will change to
reflect the next interval.
Time Remaining (Hours):
Checklist
The check list is where the operator will perform the
maintenance sign-off, see Figure 21-1. Once the operator has selected the item to sign off, pressing the
“Update” button at the bottom of the page will perform
the sign-off operation and list the maintenance performed in the maintenance log.
• This column indicates the Run hours left before the
maintenance task should be performed.
Figure 21-1. Maintenance Screen - Checklist
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
21 – 1
Section 21 • Maintenance
Notes
User:
The notes tab allows the operator to make notes to any
other personnel that might have access to the Vission
20/20.
• Lists the operator name who performed the maintenance task.
Maintenance Performed:
• Lists the maintenance task that was performed.
Run Hours:
Log
• Lists the run hours at which the maintenance task
was performed.
The maintenance log tab lists all the maintenance tasks
performed in descending order, see Figure 21-2.
Date:
• Lists the date the maintenance task was performed.
Chart
This chart is the original maintenance chart that is provided with the compressor, see Figure 21-3.
Time:
• Lists the time the maintenance task was performed.
Figure 21-2. Maintenance Screen - Log
21 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 21 • Maintenance
Figure 21-3. Maintenance Screen - Chart
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
21 – 3
21 – 4 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 22 • User Access
Overview
The user access screen is where all operators go to log
in. In the Vission 20/20, each screen has a security level,
whereby allowing operators, technicians and/or supervisors the ability to modify different sets of setpoints. The
Vission 20/20 has four levels of security, see Figure 22-1.
• Level 0 – This is the default level with no operator
logged in. The function available to the operator are
very limited and basically only allows someone to
start and stop the compressor.
• Level 1 – This is a technician level of access. All the
setpoints needed to operate and adjust the performance of the compressor will be available to an operator with this level of access.
• Level 2 – This is a supervisor level of access. Setpoints
that require a higher level of knowledge such as calibrating instrument will be available to an operator
with this level of access.
• Level 3 – This is considered a contractor level of access. The setpoints available at this level have the
most potential of causing damage to the compressor.
Therefore, this access is restricted to those only with
the highest level of competence.
The user access screen is also where new operators are
added, changed or removed. Any operator can add an
additional operator but can only add an operator of lesser or equal security level.
Apply
When selected, applies the user name and password
for security evaluation. If the User name and password
matches an existing user then the operators name will
be applied to the lower status bar and the operator will
be given access to screens of equal security level.
Figure 22-1. User Access Screen - Login
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
22 – 1
Section 22 • User Access
Login
Operator Password:
The login tab is where an operator will enter the users
name and password in order to gain access to Vission
20/20 screens.
• This entry box is for the operator’s password. The
password can be entered by touching the password
entry box and entering the password via the pop-up
keyboard.
Operators:
Manage Accounts
• All operators that have been added to the Vission
20/20 user tables will be displayed in this window. If
a name of an operator is selected from this window,
the name is added to the “Operator Name” entry box.
This tab allows the addition, removal, and modification
of authorized users, see Figure 22-2.
Operator Name:
• This entry box is for the operator’s username. The
operator can either select the username from the operators window or enter the username manually by
touching the entry box and entering the name via the
pop-up keyboard.
Operators:
• This window contains the list of authorized users already added to the Vission 20/20. Selecting a name
from this list will add that name to the “Operator
Name” entry box.
Figure 22-2. User Access Screen - Manage Accounts
22 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 22 • User Access
Operator Name:
Security Level:
• This entry box is for the operator’s username who is
to be added, removed or modified. The operator can
either select the username from the operators window or enter the username manually by touching
the entry box and entering the name via the pop-up
keyboard.
• Select a security level for the account being added or
modified. Only levels that are equal to or less than the
operator’s own security level will be shown.
Operator Password:
• This entry box is for the operator’s password. The
password can be entered by touching the password
entry box and entering the password via the pop-up
keyboard.
Add / Update:
• Pressing this button will initiate the creation or modification of the specified account.
Delete:
• Pressing this button will delete the specified account.
Verify Password:
• This entry box is to verify the operator’s password.
Verifying the password can be entered by touching
the “Verify Password” entry box and entering the
password via the pop-up keyboard.
Figure 22-3. User Access Screen - VNC Accounts
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
22 – 3
Section 22 • User Access
VNC Account
Change VNC Port Number
Port Number:
Vission 20/20 panels can be accessed remotely by using
a VNC client over TCP/IP network. This tab allows the
operator to change default VNC Password and VNC Port
number, see Figure 22-3.
Change VNC Password
• The operator will change the port number for VNC
server by touching the entry box and typing via the
pop-up keyboard. Default port number is 5900.
Operator can assign port number ranging between
5900 to 6000.
New Password:
Update:
• The operator will add the password by touching the
entry box and typing the password via the pop-up
keyboard.
• Pressing this button will initiate the modification of
the specified VNC account Port number.
Verify New Password:
Screen Security Levels
• The operator will re-enter the password by touching
the entry box and typing the password via the popup keyboard.
Update:
• Pressing this button will initiate the modification of
the VNC account.
The following table lists all screen and their base security levels, see Table 22-1. The majority of the screens
have more than one security level. The base security level gives the user access to the setpoints that can change
to performance of the compressor. The secondary security level is typically level 3 and is reserved for those
setpoints that require great care and knowledge of the
system in order to change safely.
Table 22-1. Security Access Levels
Security Access Levels
Page
User Level
*Note
Event List
Level 0
-
Input/Output States
Level 0
-
Trend Chart
Level 0
-
Help
Level 0
-
Alarms & Trips
Level 1*
Level 3 required for constraints
Compressor Scheduling
Level 1
-
Compressor Sequencing
Level 1
-
Condenser Control
Level 1*
Level 3 required for constraints
Compressor Control
Level 1*
Level 3 required for constraints
Maintenance
Level 1
-
Data Backup
Level 1*
Level 3 required to upload data
Instrument Calibration
Level 2
-
Service Option
Level 2
-
Configuration
Level 2*
Level 3 required for pages 3 - 6
Slide Calibration
Level 2
-
Timers
Level 2*
Level 3 required for constraints
VNC Account
Level 3
22 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 23 • Help Screen
Overview
Use this screen to receive help on other setpoint screens
contained within the software. These help files can be accessed from any screen. The help files describe the functionality of that screen as well as compressor operation.
Screen Features
will have to navigate through the file structure of the
USB drive to find the documents. The top box in the
USB drive will display any USB drives mounted to the
Vission 20/20 OS.
• Touching one of the listed USB devices will select that
device and list any files or PDF documents contained
on the USB drive. Selecting a folder will open that
folder and display any sub-folders of PDF documents.
Unmount:
Manual Tab:
• Contains the list of available manual sections to be
displayed in the display window, see Figure 23-1.
USB tab:
• The operator as the option to view other manuals,
typically Vilter compressor manuals on the Vission
20/20 from a USB drive, see Figure 23-2. If there are
any PDF type documents on a connected USB drive,
the names will be listed in this section. The operator
• Pressing the unmount button will disconnect the USB
drive from the Vission 20/20 operating system. Once
the device has been remove from the device list, the
USB drive can be safely removed.
Refresh:
• Pressing this button will reread the USB ports and display any new USB drives.
Figure 23-1. Help Screen - Manual
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
23 – 1
Section 23 • Help Screen
Back:
Previous:
• Pressing the back button will rewrite the file/folder
list with the previous folder level.
• Changes the page in the display window one page
less then what was showing.
Display Window:
Next:
• This window displays the context of the manual.
• Changes the page in the display window one page
more then what was showing.
Fullscreen:
• Pressing this button expand the display window to fit
the entire screen.
Page:
• Enter the page number the operator wishes to be displayed in the display window.
Version:
• Pressing the Version button displays a pop-up screen
that gives the operator information of the version of
software running on the Vission 20/20, see Figure
23-3.
Figure 23-2. Help Screen - USB
Figure 23-3. Version Pop-Up Screen
23 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 24 • Twin Screw Control
Overview
• Standard - Selects the oil pump operation as
“Full Time”.
The Vission 20/20 is capable of operating a twin screw
compressor from a number of different manufacturers.
The Vission 20/20 currently operates as a twin screw
controller in the full time oil pump and the no oil pump
configuration.
• Stal - Selects the oil pump control as “No
pump”.
Setup - Configuration Screen
Configuration Screen:
• To setup the Vission 20/20 panel for twin screw, navigate to the Configuration Screen, page 2, and select
“VRS” from the dropdown box label “Compressor”,
see Figure 24-1. Once selected, another dropdown
box labeled “Operation Type” will appear directly below the “Compressor” drop-down box. You should
also notice that the oil pump control becomes grayed
out because the oil pump operation is now determined by the type of compressor that is select from
the “Type” drop-down box.
Menu Changes:
• When selecting the twin screw option there will be
other changes that occur in other menu pages.
• Volume position indicator will disappear from
the main screen and right data panel.
• Prelube oil pump alarms and trip values will
be changed to default values for the twin screw
• Run oil pump alarm and trip values will be
changed to default values for the twin screw.
Figure 24-1. Configuration Screen - Twin Screw Option
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
24 – 1
Section 24 • Twin Screw Control
Operation
Once the twin screw is configured, its operation is
very similar as the single screw and all options that
are available for single screw configuration are also
available for twin screw. The only operational difference is the manual mode of operation. Twin screw
compressors can experience leaky slide seals that can
cause the capacity slide to drift after it has been positioned by the controller. To counteract the capacity
slide drift problem, the twin screw manual mode operation has an added anti-drift feature that automatically maintains the position of the hydraulic actuator.
Slide Calibration - Capacity Slide Valve
Potentiometer
This section provides critical information and control
parameters related to the capacity slide actuator. The
“% cap” display shows the actual value in percent of the
capacity slide without any conditioning that might be
applied to the other capacity position displays. In addition, this section displays the value of the actuator signals in millivolts in the “input Value” display box, see
Figure 24-2.
“-” Button:
• When the operator presses and holds this button, the
output associated with capacity slide decrease solenoid is energized and the oil pump is energized. The
oil pump is needed to force oil into the capacity slide
chamber to move the capacity slide.
“+” Button:
• When the operator presses and holds this button, the
output associated with capacity slide increase solenoid is energized and the oil pump is energized. The
oil pump is needed to force oil into the capacity slide
chamber to move the capacity slide.
Software limit setpoint:
• The Vission 20/20 uses the “Min Limit” and “Max
Figure 24-2. Slide Calibration - Twin Screw Control
24 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 24 • Twin Screw Control
Limit” setpoint to define an area within the mechanical stops for normal slide travel. These software limits
purpose is to prevent the slide from actually hitting
the mechanical stops which could result in a number
of undesirable consequences. By default, the software limits are set to 150mV from either end point.
The position percentage is calculated from the software limits. Therefore, it is possible to read a value
greater than 100% or less than 0% if inertial carries
the slides after these limits are reached.
Compressor Bump Pop-Up Window
• This window allows the operator to bump the compressor to flush out any oil in the compressor after a
slide valve calibration, see Figure 24-3. If the oil level
is below the lowest sight glass in the oil separator,
then bumping the compressor is recommended.
Position Signal Type:
• Position signals can be 0-5 VDC or 4-20mA to indicate current slide valve position.
Figure 24-3. Slide Calibration - Twin Screw Bump Pop-Up Window
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
24 – 3
Section 24 • Twin Screw Control
Twin Screw Oil Pressure
The twin screw compressor has two separate oil pressure
settings. They are named “Prelub Oil Pressure” and “Run
Oil Pressure” in the Alarm and Trips Menu. Both of these
oil pressures are calculated in the same way - defined as
“Filter Outlet Pressure minus Discharge Pressure.
As shown in Figure 24-4, the alarm and trip setpoints for
both of these oil pressures are set to the same values and
any adjustments to these oil pressures is usually done so
that the setpoints are the same.
OIL PRESSURE MONITORING BEFORE
COMPRESSOR STARTS
Pressing the Auto or Manual button will start the oil
pump. The decrease solenoid will be energized as well
if the capacity slide is greater than 5%. A prelub oil pressure timer called “Minimum Compressor Prelub Time”
begins timing, see Figure 24-5. This timer is adjustable
where the default time is 5 seconds. This timer allows oil
to be pushed into the oil injection lines to fill the lines
with oil BEFORE the system starts looking for prelub oil
pressure. After the Minimum Comp Prelub Timer times
out, then prelub oil pressure monitoring begins. The oil
pump will run for the time setting of “Prelub Oil Pressure
Monitor Time” (typically 20 seconds) trying to achieve
prelub oil pressure. If it fails to establish prelub oil pressure, the oil pump shuts down for 10 seconds, and
then starts and tries again. The cycle is repeated for the
“Prelube Oil Pressure Monitor Trials” setting, typically
set at “3” tries. After the third unsuccessful try, a failure
message “Prelub Oil Pump Inhibit” is generated. This indicates a failure to establish Prelub Oil Pressure. When
the Prelub Oil Pressure is established, then the compressor is commanded to start.
LOW OIL PRESSURE SAFETY BYPASS
When the compressor starts, then the Low Oil Pressure
Safety Bypass timer is started (set at 60 seconds by default, but it is adjustable).
During this time, the Prelub Oil Pressure Alarm and Trip
Figure 24-4. Prelub Oil Pressure and Run Oil Pressure Settings
24 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 24 • Twin Screw Control
setpoints are forced into the Run Oil Pressure Alarm and
Trip settings. By default, the Prelub Oil Pressure Alarm
and Trip setpoints and the Run Oil Pressure Alarm and
Trip settings are the same values, however these settings are adjustable. In some cases it may be advantageous to set the Prelub Oil Pressure Alarm and Trip setpoints to a lower value than the Run Oil Pressure Alarm
and Trip setpoints. This will provide more time for the
screw compressor to develop running oil pressure after
the compressor starts.
After the Low Oil Pressure Safety Bypass Timer expires,
the Run Oil Pressure Alarm and Trip setpoints revert to
their normal setpoints. At this time, or anytime thereafter, if the oil pressure does not exceed the Run Oil Press
Trip setpoint, then the compressor will fail on “Run Oil
Pressure” fault.
OIL PRESSURE MONITORING AFTER
COMPRESSOR STARTS
After oil pressure exists and assuming that the capacity
slide is less than 5%, the compressor now starts. During
the first 5 minutes of the compressor running, if the oil
pressure drops to the “Low Oil Pressure Trip” value (or
below) for five continuous seconds (settable by a timer
called “Oil Pressure Fail Delay” timer), then the compressor will fail on “Low Run Oil Pressure” failure. After five
minutes of the compressor running, then if the oil pressure ever drops to the low oil pressure trip value (or below), then the compressor will immediately fail on “Low
Run Oil Pressure” failure.
Figure 24-5. Timers Menu - Twin Screw Control
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
24 – 5
24 – 6 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 25 • Cool Compression Control
Overview
The cool compression compressor operation is similar
to the standard single screw compressor units, except
there is no external oil cooler to the unit. A blanket of
liquid ammonia lies on top of the oil in the oil separator. The liquid ammonia level is regulated by sensing
the liquid ammonia level with a level probe, and using
a positioning valve to vary the amount of liquid ammonia being added to the separator. The cooling occurs
through the entire compression and separation process.
The Cool Compression compressor does not have an oil
pump. When the Cool Compression compressor unit is
commanded to start, the control panel first insures that
the slide valves are at their minimum positions. The suction oil injection solenoid (SOI) is energized – allowing a
path for oil to flow into the compressor. The compressor
now starts. There is an initial pressure drop in the suction chamber of the compressor and a corresponding
increase in pressure on the discharge of the compressor. This creates a pressure differential that forces the
oil and liquid ammonia mixture through the suction oil
injection line into the suction chamber of the compressor. This oil and liquid provides lubrication and cooling
until full pressure differential lubrication is attained. As
the differential pressure increases, the oil and liquid ammonia is now injected into the screw during the compression process and the oil injection valve is allowed to
close.
Setup
Configuration Screen:
• To setup the Vission 20/20 panel for Cool
Compression, first ensure that an analog output
card is installed in the panel, and it is selected from
page 6 of the configuration screen, see Section 19.
Navigate to configuration page 2, and select “R717Cool Comp” from the drop-down box that is labeled
“Refrigerant”, see Figure 25-1. Once selected “Cool
Compression” option will appear in Oil Pump and
Oil Cooling sections and “Cool Compression” gets
selected automatically. It will also enable Superheat
Figure 25-1. Configuration Screen
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
25 – 1
Section 25 • Cool Compression Control
Auto Load
Monitoring on the screen.
• As previously described, Cool Compression
compressor does not have an oil pump. Instead
it has a suction oil injection solenoid to provide oil and liquid ammonia for lubrication and
cooling.
• Cool Compression liquid injection 1 and liquid injection 2 outputs will operate as high / low
pressure ratio solenoid outputs.
Control Functions
• Auto Load at Start
In the Compressor Control Menu, special cool compression control functions are now available, see Figure 25-2.
These new functions are:
• Auto Load
• Suction Oil Injection Settings
• Danfoss Positioning Valve Settings
• Auto load operation will force the compressor to
load to a minimum value once the compressor has
started. By loading the compressor to a minimum
value, and maintaining this capacity, a pressure ratio
is created across the compressor, to ensure adequate
lubrication of the compressor, and also that the compressor does not experience high discharge superheat conditions. Since compressor lubrication is of
great importance, all load limiting is disabled when
auto load is engaged.
• Defines the value at which Compressor (capacity slide) should be loaded (and maintained)
at start if Auto Load is enabled.
• Auto Load Timer
• This timer defines the maximum time that
the Auto Load operation will be engaged. After
the timer expires, Auto Load will be disengaged.
Figure 25-2. Compressor Control Screen - Cool Compression Control (Page 4)
25 – 2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 25 • Cool Compression Control
• Auto load will be disengaged when one of the following conditions occur;
Using a Positioning Valve for Liquid Ammonia Level
Control
• Pressure ratio reaches a value of 2.0 or
greater.
• A level probe inserted in the oil separator detects
liquid ammonia level. Based on the level of the ammonia (0-100%), the level probe sends a directly proportional 4-20 mA signal to the Vission 20/20 panel.
The positioning valve is then positioned based on
the Positioning Valve settings graph shown in Figure
25-2.
• Compressor has been running for 10 minutes
(defined by Auto Load Timer).
• Suction pressure setpoint has been reached.
Suction Oil Injection Setting
• In order to maintain adequate lubrication during low
pressure ratio conditions, the Suction Oil Injection
(SOI) solenoid is turned ON and the capacity of the
compressor is reduced.
• The SOI solenoid will cycle ON and OFF based on the
pressure ratio across the compressor.
• SOI Solenoid ON
• Defines the Pressure ratio value at which
SOI is turned ON (default 2.00) (Digital Output
Board #1:2).
• SOI Solenoid OFF
• Defines the Pressure ratio value at which SOI
is turned OFF (default 2.04) (Digital Output
Board #1:2).
• Looking at the graph, when the compressor starts,
the positioning valve placement (Vertical Axis) is determined based on the liquid ammonia level that is
sensed in the oil separator (Horizontal Axis). It can
be seen that as the liquid ammonia level increases
(corresponding to a larger mA value), the positioning
valve moves towards a closed position.
• The Positioning Valve position (0-100% limits) is defined at three distinct levels:
• Start Level (lowest liquid ammonia level - positioning valve at maximum open position).
• Leakage (normal operating position and ammonia level).
• Overfill Leakage (highest liquid ammonia level–positioning valve at minimum open
position).
• SOI Load Limit
• Defines the capacity slide position at which
the compressor capacity slide will unload to if
pressure ratio falls below “SOI Solenoid ON” setpoint. This setpoint is not active until Auto Load
disengages.
• The SOI solenoid will also cycle on if the discharge
temperature superheat reaches a value of 5°F (this
value is not settable). Generally, anytime the SOI
solenoid cycles on, the capacity is limited to the SOI
Load Limit setpoint. However, this is not true if the
SOI solenoid cycles on based on the discharge temperature superheat 5°F rule. If discharge temperature
superheat continues to climb and reaches a value of
6°F, the compressor will be inhibited from loading. If
discharge temperature superheat still continues to
climb and reaches a value of 8°F or more, then the
compressor will be unloaded until the superheat
drops below 8°F or the capacity has reached the SOI
Load Limit setting.
• Liquid ammonia levels are defined at four distinct levels (4-20ma limits);
• Start SP (minimum liquid ammonia level in
separator – the positioning valve is maximum
open).
• Linear SP (minimum level of liquid ammonia
for normal operating position).
• Upper SP (maximum level of liquid ammonia
for normal operating position).
• Max SP (maximum liquid ammonia level – positioning valve is minimum open position, maintaining some leakage).
• On Alarms and Trips screen, Low Oil Separator Start
Temperature, High Filter Diff Start Pressure settings
are disabled.
• On Timers screen Oil Level #1 Safety Trip Delay, Oil
Level #2 Safety Trip Delay settings are disabled.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
25 – 3
Section 25 • Cool Compression Control
Operational Differences from Single
Screw
Once the Cool Compression is configured, most setup
options available for a single screw are also available for
Cool Compression. However, there are significant operational differences that are mostly associated with the
compressor safeties:
injection solenoid and is controlled via discharge superheat. When the discharge superheat reaches 5°F,
the solenoid is turned on. When it falls back to below
4°F, the solenoid is turned off. An additional solenoid
(referenced as SV4 – as called the High Press Ratio
solenoid) provides supplemental oil cooling based on
pressure ratio. When the pressure ratio rises above
5.0, the solenoid is turned on. When the pressure ratio falls back to below 4.8, the solenoid is turned off.
1. The Cool Compression program ignores,
• Low Oil Separator Alarm / Trip at start
Level Switches
• High Filter Differential at start
• There are two level switches in the oil separator, a
“high” and a “low”. During normal running operation, the oil level is above both switches. When the oil
level starts to drop and opens the high level switch,
a 10 minute timer starts. When the timer elapses a
flashing “add oil to middle of sight glass” message appears on the main screen. When the operator adds
enough oil to close the high level switch, the message disappears.
• Prelube Oil Pressure Alarm and Trip
• Run Oil Pressure Alarm and Trip (Pressure
Ratios are monitored instead).
• High Discharge Temp Alarm and Trip
(Discharge Temp Superheat is monitored)
• Low Suction Temp Alarm and Trip
• Low Oil Injection Temp Alarm and Trip
• High Oil Injection Temp Alarm and Trip
2. SOI solenoid is forced on for first 60 seconds of running and 10 minutes after compressor is stopped.
3. Auto Load Enabled: When Auto Load is engaged at
start, it then maintains the position of capacity slide to
the Auto Load limit (approx: 30 %, but less than 50 %).
It displays status message “Cool Compression Capacity
Hold” when it is running. Unless Auto load is disengaged
compressor will run at auto load limit position. Auto load
disengages if enough Pressure Ratio is built (typically
more than 2.04) or setpoints are achieved.
4. SOI Solenoid: During normal operation if pressure ratio drops to a lower value (typically below 2.00) then it
energizes SOI solenoid and maintains the position of capacity slide to the SOI Load limit (approx : 30 %, less than
50 %). It also displays status message “Cool Compression
Capacity Hold”. If enough Pressure Ratio is built across
the compressor (typically more than 2.04), it again resumes the run mode and control normally.
5. It performs Cool Compression specific checks periodically like:
NOTICE
If oil is not added and the oil level continues to drop
thereby opening the “low” oil level switch, a 10 minute
timer starts again. When the timer elapses, the compressor shutdowns immediately and displays “Low Oil
Level” failure. If enough oil is added to close the low
level switch, then this will allow the operator to press
the reset button and clear the “Low Oil Level” failure
and “Add Oil” message.
Oil Level Messaging After Compressor Stops
• The low level switch is monitored after the compressor stops. If the switch opens after the compressor
stops, a two minute timer starts. If the switch stays
open, and the timer expires, a failure is generated
called “Lo Oil Level Fail after Stop” and the compressor is disabled from restarting until oil is added to
close the low level switch. Note that this failure is
generated ONLY when the low level switch opens after the compressor stops.
• Controlling the liquid level positioning valve
as liquid ammonia level changes .
• Low / high Pressure Oil Injection ports control
as Pressure Ratio and Superheat temperature
changes.
Supplemental Oil Cooling Solenoids
• Some cool compression units will have supplemental
oil cooling solenoids. One is called the suction liquid
25 – 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 26 • Remote Oil Cooler
Overview
Remote Oil Cooler Setpoint
This screen allows the operator to view and adjust
Remote Oil Cooler setpoint settings associated with
Remote Oil Cooler operation, see Figure 26-1. This
screen will only be active if the Remote Oil Cooler Control
option has been enabled from the Configuration Screen,
see Section 19.
Run Mode:
The Remote Oil Cooler Control operation allows the cycling of fans and pumps in order to maintain a specific
Remote Oil Cooler Temperature. The five different steps
in step control allow selection of fans, pumps and VFD
in one or more steps. When a VFD is employed, VFD is
allowed to reach maximum speed, then if additional capacity is needed, the next fan or pump is brought on.
The VFD will modulate down and then back up to 100%
again, then the next fan or pump is brought on. This
method allows the smoothest Remote Oil Cooler control
by spacing the VFD between the fan and pump steps,
while maintaining a Remote Oil Cooler Temperature
pressure that matches the setpoint.
• The mode of operation by default. Remote Oil Cooler
operation will not be performed when this mode is
active.
• Run Mode allows the selection of different modes of
operation for Remote Oil Cooler. The choices for selection are;
Run Never
Run With Comp
• Automatic operation of Remote Oil Cooler selected
when cooling control is required to only run when the
compressor is running.
Run Always
• Automatic operation of Remote Oil Cooler selected
when cooling control is required to run even when
the compressor is off.
Figure 26-1. Remote Oil Cooler Screen (Page 1)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
26 – 1
Section 26 • Remote Oil Cooler
Manual
• Mode for controlling Remote Oil Cooler operation
manually. Operator controls the operation by manual
stepping using an on/off toggle button at each step.
setpoint and the delay timers are satisfied. Step Delay
acts as “ON” timer while loading and acts as “OFF”
timer while unloading for the same step.
Low Speed Fan:
• This is the Remote Oil Cooler Temperature setpoint
that needs to be maintained.
• Allows steps to have option for time delay in case of
fan spin down. Any of Out #1 to Out #4 can be selected as Low Speed Fan through combo box. E.g.:
Let’s say Out #2 is selected as Low Speed Fan in Step
2. When step 2 becomes active during Remote Oil
Cooler operation which is after Step 2 timeout delay, Out #2 is left off for time as set by the operator
in High to Low Speed Delay. After low speed fan energizes, then timer for Step 3 starts timing.
Upper Deadband:
Control:
• This is the Remote Oil Cooler Temperature setpoint
upper deadband value.
• Toggle any of the steps On/Off during Manual operation of Remote Oil Cooler. This button is active only
when Run Mode selected is Manual. During Auto operation of Remote Oil Cooler Control, control button
for active step will be “ON”.
Remote Oil Cooler Temperature:
• This is the read only parameter and it displays the
present value of Remote Oil Cooler Temperature.
Remote Oil Cooler Temperature is mapped on Analog
Auxiliary Input #5.
Remote Oil Cooler Temperature Setpoint:
Lower Deadband:
• This is the Remote Oil Cooler Temperature setpoint
lower deadband value.
High to Low Speed Fan Delay:
• This is time delay for fan spin down in case of 2 speed
motor/dual speed fan.
Step Control
The Step Control allows the operator to setup the manner in which Fans, Pumps & VFD will be turned on/off.
Fans & Pumps are connected on digital outputs Out #1
to Out #4. VFD Fan is connected on Analog Output. Each
step can have maximum of five outputs connected to it.
Each step can be opted in or out depending on enabling
of checkbox.
When Run Mode is Auto and Remote Oil Cooler
Temperature rises above upper deadband, Remote Oil
Cooler step gets incremented from Step 1 to Step 5 and
hence switching on/off Pumps, Fans & VFD connected on
outputs. This holds true for decrementing of steps from
Step 5 to Step 1 when Remote Oil Cooler Temperature
falls below lower deadband.
Step Delay:
• Allows operator to set time delays between Remote
Oil Cooler steps. Remote Oil Cooler Temperature
must be outside upper or lower deadband continuously for delay time in order to increase or decrease
Remote Oil Cooler steps. While in a VFD step, an additional step can only be added once VFD has reached
its maximum speed setpoint and the delay timers are
satisfied. Similarly in a VFD step, a step can only be
removed once VFD has reached its minimum speed
26 – 2
VFD Settings
This page is active only when Remote Oil Cooler VFD is
selected in Configuration Screen, see Section 19. For
Remote Oil Cooler VFD Screen, see Figure 26-2. When a
VFD fan is used for the remote oil cooler oil cooling, the
speed of the VFD is controlled using PID algorithm.
P = Proportional (gain):
• Used to adjust the fan speed action in direct proportion to the difference between the control setpoint
and the process variable (SP - PV = error). The proportional term is a unit less quantity and is used for
coarse adjustment. This setpoint should be set to the
lowest value that gives adequate control system response. Increasing the proportional setting increases
the control system’s sensitivity to small process fluctuations and the tendency to hunt.
I = Integral (reset):
• Used to adjust the capacity control action, integrating the error over time, to account for a small error
that has persisted for a long time. This quantity is
used for fine adjustment. This setpoint is used to
smooth out process variations. This setpoint should
be set high enough to prevent hunting but not too
high or it will cause control system overshoot.
D = Derivative (rate):
• Used to adjust the capacity control action, accounting for how fast the error is changing, positively or
negatively.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Section 26 • Remote Oil Cooler
Maximum Speed:
Minimum Speed:
• This setpoint defines the maximum speed in percentage for Remote Oil Cooler VFD Fan at which it
should run for continuous step delay time to increase
Remote Oil Cooler steps. E.g. let’s say setpoint is kept
at 95%. Then Remote Oil Cooler VFD fan will have to
run at speed of 95% or more to advance to next step.
Maximum Speed can be set as 100%, which is when
analog output (at which Remote Oil Cooler VFD fan
is connected) reaches to 20mA in its normal range of
4-20mA.
• This setpoint defines the minimum speed in percentage for Remote Oil Cooler VFD Fan at which it should
run for continuous step delay time to decrease
Remote Oil Cooler steps. E.g. let’s say setpoint is kept
at 5%. Then Remote Oil Cooler VFD fan will have to run
at speed 5% or less to advance to next step. Minimum
Speed can be set as 0%, which is when analog output
(at which Remote Oil Cooler VFD fan is connected)
reaches 4mA in its normal range of 4-20 mA.
Figure 26-2. Remote Oil Cooler VFD Screen (Page 2)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
26 – 3
26 – 4 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix A • Vission 20/20 Troubleshooting Guide
Vission 20/20 Troubleshooting Guide
In the event of a problem with the Vilter Vission 20/20, the help screen, along with your electrical drawings will help
determine the cause.
NOTICE
Before applying power to the Vission 20/20 control
panel, all wiring to the panel should be per the
National Electrical Code (NEC). Specifically check for
proper voltage and that the neutral is grounded at
the source. An equipment ground should also be run
to the panel.
Table A. Vission 20/20 Troubleshooting Guide
Problem
Solution
Vission 20/20 does not boot up, no Check that 120VAC is run to circuit breaker CB1 located on the terminal
strip. The neutral should be brought to any “N” terminal on the terminal
lights light on any boards.
strip.
Check that circuit breaker CB1’s switch is in the ON position.
Use a voltmeter to insure 120VAC is being applied to the power supply,
located on the door. Check that 120 volts is present at the F1 fuse on the
power supply, located on the front of the door. If all of the above are OK,
the power supply may be bad. To test the power supply, check DC voltages
at the power supply output. If proper voltages are not found at these test
points, the power supply may be faulty.
Vission 20/20 appears to be boot- Remove power COMPLETELY from the Vission 20/20 and restart the
ed, lights are lit on the boards, but controller.
no touchscreen display is evident:
WARNING
The inverter board creates a high rms voltage to drive
the backlight - it can exceed 1500VAC. Use extreme
caution and insure that voltage has been removed
from the board before physical inspection. Visually
check cable connections located on the LCD inverter
board. This board is located inside the door on the
LCD touch screen back plane next to the single board
computer. Physically inspect board to insure that
all cable connectors are connected tightly to the
board connectors. If these are inserted correctly,
the problem could be a bad LCD inverter board or a
component failure.
Vission 20/20 boots up but all data Check analog board jumpers to insure proper node addresses are set up
temperatures and pressures are ze- on all boards. Physically inspect power and communication jumper caroed and do not update.
bles to insure they are inserted properly and completely. Two LEDs on all
boards show the status of the communications for the board. LED1 is on
when a command is received at the board from the single board computer
(SBC), and LED2 is on when a response is sent from the board to the SBC.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
A-1
A - 2 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Contents
Vission 20/20 Compressor Control Setup ............................................................................................... B-3
Vission 20/20 Compressor Control Setpoints Setup................................................................................ B-7
Vission 20/20 Compressor Sequencing Setup......................................................................................... B-11
Database Backup Procedure................................................................................................................... B-19
Flashcard Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................... B-21
Danfoss Liquid Injection Valve Setup ...................................................................................................... B-23
User Access Menu .................................................................................................................................. B-25
Remote Control and Monitoring of Vission 20/20 Control Panel ............................................................. B-27
Phoenix Contact PSM-ME-RS485/RS485-P Isolator .................................................................................B-49
Vessel Level Control Setup for Vission 20/20 Control Panel ..................................................................... B-51
VPLUS (AC Motor) Setup Procedure for Vission 20/20 Panel ................................................................... B-59
VPLUS (DC Motor) Setup Procedure for Vission 20/20 Panel ................................................................... B-65
Table B-4. Vission 20/20 Communication Table ...................................................................................... B-73
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B-1
B - 2 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Vission 20/20 Compressor Control
Setup
SCOPE
Vission 20/20 programs – version 4550.1 and later.
Pulldown
The Pulldown feature provides a method of slowly pulling the suction pressure down from a high value, by
slowly lowering the suction pressure control setpoint
over a time period. This feature is sometimes required
on systems that have liquid recirculation systems. On
these systems, if the suction pressure is pulled down
too fast, the pumps can cavitate causing vibration and
damage to the pumps. By slowly lowering the suction
pressure setpoint the suction pressure can be slowly
lowered preventing liquid recirculation pump cavitation.
Pulldown is also be used for new plant startups. Pulling
the suction pressure (and resultant temperature) of new
buildings down too quickly can cause structural damage, so limiting the suction pressure Pulldown rate will
prevent this, allowing time to de-humidify the rooms as
the temperature in the rooms are pulled down.
Pulldown can only be activated when controlling in
Suction Pressure Control mode (Setpoint #1).
NOTE
In new plant construction Pulldown applications,
water freezing in the concrete will lead to structural
damage. For new plant construction Pulldown
applications, it is highly recommended that the
Auto-Cycle be enabled while running Pulldown.
During Pulldown, when the Suction Pressure
Control setpoint is slowly lowered, the AutoCycle Start and Stop setpoints are also slowly
lowered. The Auto-Cycle Stop setpoint will turn the
compressor off should the suction pressure fall too
fast. For additional safety, the Low Suction Pressure
Alarm and Trip setpoints should also be set so that
the suction pressure will not reach a point that can
cause building damage due to water freeze.
SETUP
The Pulldown section in the Compressor Control Menu
provides;
• Selection to enable / disable the Pulldown process.
• Delay per Step setting which defines how long the
compressor will be controlled at the current suction
pressure setpoint.
• Stop pressure setpoint defines the point at which the
Pulldown function will stop operation. Normal compressor control will then resume, with the control
setpoint being set to the Pulldown “Stop Pressure”
setting.
• Auto-cycle Differential setpoint defines a differential
above and below the suction pressure control setpoint. These points define the auto-cycle start and
stop pressure setpoints. The auto-cycle Start pressure is the suction pressure setpoint + auto-cycle
differential setpoint. The Auto-cycle Stop pressure
is the suction pressure setpoint - auto-cycle differential setpoints.
SELECTION FOR Pulldown SECTION OF
COMPRESSOR CONTROL MENU
(Reference Figure B-1)
Pulldown
• Enables access to Pulldown control setpoints.
Uncheck the box to disable the Pulldown setpoints.
Initiate Pulldown at Next Start
• Enables the Pulldown feature when the compressor
starts
Step Pressure
• This setpoint defines the step increments which the
suction pressure will be controlled at.
Delay Per Step
• Defines the time increment at which the compressor
will be controlled for each step.
Stop Pressure
• Pressure at which the Pulldown feature is deactivated. After Pulldown has completed, the suction
pressure setpoint will remain at this setting and the
compressor will continue to control at this pressure.
• Selection to initiate the Pulldown process at the next
compressor start.
• Step pressure defines the “steps” (in psig) in which
the suction pressure setpoint is decremented.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B-3
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-1. Pulldown Setpoints
SETPOINT SELECTION EXAMPLE
The following example is to illustrate the selection of setpoints for the Pulldown feature. The values picked are NOT
representative of actual field applications.
Assumptions and Variables:
• Current suction pressure is at 80 psig
• Target suction pressure is 20 psig. (This defines a change of 60 psig).
• Time duration allowed to get to setpoint is 10 days (240 hours) of Pulldown time.
• Suction pressure change allowed for each step is 5 psig.
To calculate the Delay Per Step setpoint:
Number of Pulldown Steps = Delta 60 psig change * 1 step/5 psig = 12 steps
Delay per step = 240 hours / 12 steps = 20 hours/step
So, for the first 20 hours the compressor runs at 75 psig, then for the next 20 hours at 70 psig, then for the next 20
hours at 65 psig, and so forth.
After the 12th step (running at 25 psig), 240 hours will have elapsed, and the new setpoint changes to 20 psig. After
the Pulldown setpoint equals or is less than the control setpoint, the Pulldown feature disables itself.
B-4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Pulldown OPERATION EXAMPLE
Assumptions:
• Compressor is off
• Pulldown is selected
• “Initiate Pulldown at Next Start” is selected
• Current suction pressure = 80 PSIG
• Auto-cycle setpoints are enabled
• Pulldown setpoints are setup per the Setpoint Selection Example
Variables:
• Step Pressure = 5.0 PSIG
• Delay Per Step = 20 hours
• Stop Pressure = 20 PSIG
• Auto-cycle Differential = 4 PSIG
Operator presses Unit Start Auto button and the compressor starts. Two items occur:
• The Pulldown feature is now operational
• When Pulldown feature is active:
• Pumpdown is disabled (Pulldown and Pumpdown operation modes are mutually exclusive)
• Low Suction Pressure Stop Load and Unload setpoints are active (Make sure that these setpoints do not
conflict with the Pulldown Stop setpoint)
• The Pulldown setpoints are immediately calculated:
Initial Pulldown setpoint = Current Suction Pressure 80 psig minus Step Pressure (5 psig) = 75 psig
Auto-Cycle Start Pressure = Pulldown setpoint (75 psig) plus Auto-Cycle Differential (4 psig) = 79 psig
Auto-cycle Stop Pressure = Pulldown setpoint (75 psig) minus Auto-Cycle Differential (4 psig) = 71 psig
The compressor will maintain the suction pressure at 75 psig for the first 20 hours, and then the next calculation of
Pulldown setpoints will be calculated:
Subsequent Pulldown setpoint = Suction Pressure setpoint (75 psig) minus Step Pressure (5 psig) = 70 psig.
Auto-Cycle Start Pressure = Pulldown Setpoint (70psig) plus Auto-Cycle Differential (4 psig) = 74 psig
Auto-Cycle Stop Pressure = Pulldown Setpoint (70 psig) minus Auto-Cycle Differential (4 psig) = 66 psig
After 20 hours of running at 70 psig, the next set of Pulldown setpoints are calculated. This is repeated until the target
setpoint (Stop Pressure setpoint) is reached. The Pulldown operation is then disabled and the compressor will continue to operate at this setpoint.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B-5
B - 6 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Vission 20/20 Compressor Control
Setpoints Setup
To enable the two setpoint operation, do the following:
• In the section “Compressor Control”, enter “2” for
each control in the “# Controllers” box.
SCOPE
Vission 20/20 programs – version 4550.1 and later
COMPRESSOR CONTROL SETPOINTS
COMPRESSOR SETPOINT #1 AND SETPOINT #2
Navigate to the Compressor Control screen and enter
in the desired control setpoints for both Setpoint 1 and
Setpoint 2.
The Vission 20/20 allows for multiple control setpoints.
This can be utilized for nighttime or weekend setpoint
adjustment in cold storage facilities or when a compressor is being used in a swing application, where it swings
between booster and high stage operation. Setpoint 1
can be setup to operate as a booster compressor and
Setpoint 2 can be setup to operate the compressor to
meet the high stage setpoint.
Log in to set up both Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2 as shown
in Figure B-3. The load and unloading response of the
compressor for both setpoints can also be changed. This
will be useful when the compressor is operating between
a high stage and booster application.
Set up the “Load Limit” setpoints at different settings
when operating the compressor between a high stage
and booster application as shown in Figure B-4.
SETUP
The configuration screen must first be setup to enable
two setpoints, see Figure B-2.
Figure B-2. Configuration Screen (Page 2) - Two Setpoint Operation Setup
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B-7
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-3. Compressor Control Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2 Setup
B-8
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
CONTROL MODE DROPDOWN BOX
SAFETY SETPOINTS
In Figure B-4, the Control Mode dropdown box allows
selection of the active setpoints.
In Figure B-5, the Alarm and Trip Safety setpoints also
have Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2 settings. These should
be set up for proper operation when operating.
To change from Setpoint 1 to Setpoint 2 being the active
setpoint, do the following:
• Select the Control Mode dropdown box, and then
select Setpoint 2.
• This can be done when the compressor is off or
running.
CAUTION
Please be aware that changing the active setpoint
while the compressor is running could end up shutting
the compressor off. A control setting (i.e. Auto-Cycle
Stop setpoint or Low Suction Pressure trip setpoint)
may shut the compressor down as soon as you make
the switch depending upon the setting of the new
active setpoint.
DIRECT I/O OPERATION AND SETPOINT 1 AND
SETPOINT 2 SELECTION
If the compressor is being operated in Direct I/O mode,
then selection of the active setpoint is accomplished
from an input module. Reference the wiring diagram to
identify the module. The Setpoint 1 / Setpoint 2 selection module will be recognized when the compressor is
placed in REMOTE mode (by pressing the Unit Start button and then the Remote button). When the input module is energized, then Setpoint 2 is active. De-energizing
the module places the Vission 20/20 control panel into
Setpoint 1 mode.
Figure B-4. Compressor Control Load Limit Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2 Setup
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B-9
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
SERIAL OR ETHERNET OPERATION AND SETPOINT
1 AND SETPOINT 2 SELECTION
Refer to Table B-4, for register information for setting the
active setpoint.
Figure B-5. Alarm and Trip Safety Setpoints for Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2
B - 10
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Vission 20/20 Compressor Sequencing
Setup
SCOPE
Vission 20/20 programs – version 4550.1 and later
OVERVIEW
Compressor sequencing in the Vission 20/20 panel is
carried out by utilizing the Ethernet communication
port using Modbus TCP protocol. Future program releases will accommodate using the serial RS-485 Modbus
RTU port. This will give the Vission 20/20 control panel
the ability to sequence Vission control panels acting as
Master Control. All legacy Vission panels will always act
as slaves.
Compressor sequencing is accomplished by the master compressor, monitoring its own control parameter
(either suction pressure or process temperature). As
its control parameter changes value, it will make decisions to start, stop, load and unload slave compressors
as needed, to maintain the control setpoint which is defined in the master compressor Sequencing screen.
NOTE
The master compressor will ALWAYS be priority #1
compressor – and act as the trim compressor. So this
must be taken into account when deciding which
compressor is to act as the master compressor.
The following discussion assumes that the physical
Ethernet network has been installed between all Vission
20/20 control panels.
CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW
MASTER COMPRESSOR CONTROL SETPOINTS
SETUP
Navigate to the Compressor Control menu of the Master
Compressor – page 1, see Figure B-6. The “Pressure
Control Setpoint” setting defines the control setpoint
for the entire sequencing system. The capacity increase and capacity decrease proportional control settings define the loading and unloading settings for the
Figure B-6. Master Compressor Loading, Unloading and Auto-cycle Setpoints Setup
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 11
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
master compressor ONLY. (The slave compressor(s)
load and unloading is setup in the master Compressor
Sequencing menu). The Auto-cycle settings can also be
setup for the Master Compressor, to establish settings of
when the Master compressor will automatically cycle on
and off.
NOTE
The proportional control settings affect the loading
and unloading of the master compressor only. The
slave compressor loading and unloading rules are
defined in the Compressor Sequencing screen of the
master compressor. Also, during slave compressor
sequencing, the Auto-cycle setpoints are not active
for the slave compressors, even if Auto-cycle has
been selected. However, it may still be desirable
to check the Auto-cycle setpoints for the slave
compressors. This can be desirable if the Master
Compressor panel is powered down, and the slave
compressors then revert to “Local” control. When
the panels revert to “Local” control, then the Autocycle setpoints would become active.
SETUP OF MASTER COMPRESSOR FOR
SEQUENCING SLAVE COMPRESSORS
Logon to the Master Compressor and navigate to the
Compressor Sequencing screen, page 2. Wait until all
slaves names show up under Equipment List on the last
page of the Compressor Sequencing menu. Use the
Refresh button to update the screen, see Figure B-7.
MASTER COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING MENU
SETUP
The master compressor loads and unloads itself based
on the proportional control settings that are set in its
own Compressor Control Setpoints menu. The Autocycle Setpoints can also be enabled for the master compressor, which would define the setpoints for when the
master compressor will stop and start. Auto-cycle settings on the slaves are not active during sequencing,
however you still may wish to select Auto-cycle on the
slave compressor for the circumstance where the power
is removed from the Master panel, and the slave compressors would then revert to “Local” control.
Figure B-7. Setup of Master Compressor for Slave Compressor(s) Loading and Unloading
B - 12
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
The master compressor controls the slave compressors
based on the master compressor control setpoints as
well as the setpoints entered in the master compressor
sequencing menu. Page 1 of the master compressor
sequencing menu (see Figure B-8) allows the operator
to view and adjust settings which are used for compressor sequencing. The pressure / temperature control setpoints and capacity load / unload timers to accomplish
sequencing control are defined here:
setpoint + load rate 1 offset and goes beyond the
control setpoint + load rate 2 offset then sequencing
decisions are made according to load rate 2 timer.
Load Rate 1 Offset (Inner)
• Defines the inner pressure/temp setpoint offset to
monitor compressor load. If suction pressure / proc
temp surpasses the Control Setpoint + load rate 1
offset then sequencing decisions are made according to load rate 1 timer.
1.
Load Rate 2 Offset (Outer)
2.
Load Rate 1 Offset (Inner)
3.
Suction Pressure / Process Temperature Control
Setpoint
4.
Unload Rate 1 Offset (Inner)
• The target setpoints are read only values here.
These setpoints can be changed by logging on
to “Compressor Control” menu of the Master
Compressor.
5.
Unload Rate 2 Offset (Outer)
Unload rate 1 offset (Inner)
Load Rate 2 Offset (Outer)
• Defines the outer pressure/temperature setpoint
offset to monitor compressor load. If suction pressure / process temperature surpasses the control
Suction Pressure /Process Temperature Control Setpoint
• Defines the inner pressure setpoint to monitor compressor unload. If suction pressure / proc temp goes
below the Control Setpoint minus the unload rate 1
offset then sequencing decisions are made according to unload rate 1 timer.
Figure B-8. Slave Compressor(s) Loading and Unloading Setup
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 13
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Unload Rate 2 Offset (Outer)
• Defines the outer pressure setpoint offset to monitor compressor unload. If Suction pressure / proc
temp goes surpasses the Control Setpoint minus
unload rate 1 offset and then goes beyond Control
Setpoint minus unload rate 2 offset then sequencing
decisions are made according to unload rate 2 timer.
Users below security level 2 (Supervisor) are not allowed
to edit the sequencing settings.
Example:
automatically. This contains names of all the compressors in the network communicating with the
Master compressor. Operator can select Equipment
name from drop down list. Operator should make
sure that same equipment name is not repeated in
the table. If it is, rename the offending slave(s).
Examples of acceptable unique names:
• master , slave no.1, slave no.2, comp no.1, comp
no.2, etc.
Pressure control setpoints for setpoint 20 psig,
Load Rate 2 Offset (Outer) = 4 psig
Control
Load Rate 1 Offset (Inner) = 2 psig
• [ON/OFF] Inclusion/exclusion of a compressor
partaking in the sequencing is decided on basis of
this toggle button. Operator can include / exclude
compressor by toggling the ON /OFF button. Note:
The master compressor is always “ON” and cannot
be deselected.
Suction Pressure setpoint = 20 psig
Unload Rate 1 Offset (Inner) = 2 psig
Unload Rate 2 Offset (Outer) = 4 psig
Timers:
Load Rate 1 (Inner) = 30 sec
Example:
Load Rate 2 (Outer) = 20 sec
The operator can configure all settings for a particular
slave compressor and set the control as OFF, so that it
won’t be a part of sequencing steps. If the operator decides to enable this compressor by selecting ON, then it
will be considered for the next load / unload cycle.
Unload Rate 1 (Inner) = 25 sec
Unload Rate 2 (Outer) = 20 sec
Assumptions:
• Master compressor is at 100% capacity
• Slave compressor has started and loaded to its minimum capacity setpoint
Suction pressure currently = 21 psig, so it falls within
deadband region defined above. The sequencing will
stop loading / unloading when the suction pressure is
within deadband.
Now assume suction pressure currently = 23 psig, it is
beyond load rate 1 offset, but less than load rate 2 offset, so program will monitor suction pressure every 30
sec (as per load rate 1 timer).
Suction pressure currently = 17 psig, it is less than unload rate 1 offset, but greater than unload rate 2 offset,
so program will monitor suction pressure every 25 sec
(as per unload rate 1 timer).
COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING EQUIPMENT LIST
The last page of the Compressor Sequencing menu allows the operator to view and adjust settings that are
used for sequencing the slave compressors, see Figure
B-7.
Equipment
• Options of this combo box are updated
B - 14
NOTE
Switching a slave compressor control to OFF
while it is running in auto sequencing mode puts
the respective slave compressor into local auto
mode. This feature is used to add / remove slave
compressors to sequence table when running in
auto sequence mode. The slave compressor can
be put back into remote mode for sequencing by
pressing Auto Start->Remote again on the slave
compressor.
CFM
• CFM column is a read only field ( it is not settable ).
These values are updated automatically when a slave
compressor is selected from the Equipment combo
box. The value shown is the compressor’s capacity
in CFM. The CFM is used to determine when there
is enough “system” compressor capacity available
so that the master can shut a slave compressor off
without causing slave compressor cycling.
PRIORITY
• This defines priorities of compressors on the network. This priority will decide the sequence order in
which compressors will be turned on and off during
sequence cycle. The lower the priority number, the
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
greater the priority of the compressor. Operator
should choose the priorities of the compressors.
Example:
Configured step = 5 %
Example:
Configured min cap = 10 %
“1” is highest priority.
Configured max cap = 80 %
Compressor with priority “2” has higher priority than
compressor with priority “4”.
Program starts loading compressor in steps of 5 %,
so every interval values will be,
Interval 1 – 10 % (min cap)
STEP
Interval 2 – 10% + 5% = 15 %
• This parameter defines the size of the capacity
step, for a slave compressor, that will occur when a
change in capacity is needed. The step is defined as
a percentage of the compressor capacity. In the case
when last step makes total capacity greater than
maximum capacity (Max Cap) setpoint, the total
capacity will get reduced to maximum capacity setting. Same is applicable when last step makes total
capacity lower then minimum capacity (Min Cap)
setpoint. The Min Cap setting will take priority.
Interval 3 – 15% + 5% = 20 %
Example:
Configured step = 20 %
Configured min cap = 10 %
Configured max cap = 80 %
Program starts loading slave compressor in steps of
20 %, so every interval values will be,
Interval 1 – 10 % (min cap)
Interval 2 – 10% + 20% = 30 %
Interval 3 – 30% + 20% = 50 %
Interval 4 – 50% + 20% = 70 %
Interval 5 – 70% + 20% = 90 % (which is more than
max cap, so last step will be 80%)
MIN CAP / MAX CAP (slave compressors)
• Defines the lowest and highest capacity in percentage with which a slave compressor is allowed to run.
Minimum capacity value takes preference on first
step value. Maximum capacity value takes preference over last step value.
Interval 4 – 20% + 5% = 25 %
.
.
Last Interval – 75% + 5 % = 80 % = ( max cap)
MIN CAP / MAX CAP (master compressor)
• Defines the “trigger” points at which the master
will begin to make decisions to either start or stop
another compressor. Unlike the slave compressor(s)
Min and Max Cap values, which actually “limit”
capacity, the master compressor can and will load
and unload past its Min and Max Cap value setpoints
– which act as sequencing “trigger” points.
MAX CAP (master)
• When master compressor reaches the “Max Cap”
setpoint and the suction pressure is more than a
value of load rate 1 offset, then the master starts the
machine start timer to start the next priority slave
compressor available.
Max Cap (master) Example:
Configured max cap of master compressor = 80 %
Load Rate 1 Offset (Inner) = 2 psig
Suction Pressure Setpoint = 20 psig
Suction Pressure Currently at 23 psig
Master Compressor Capacity at 85 %.
At this point, the Master compressor will start the machine start timer to start the next priority slave compressor available.
MIN CAP (master)
• When master compressor reaches its “Min Cap”
setpoint and the suction pressure is less than a
value of unload rate 1 offset for the time period of
the unload rate 1 timer, then the master will adjust
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 15
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
(decrease) the slave compressor capacity . When a
slave compressor has been unloaded to its MIN CAP
setpoint, and the suction pressure is still less than a
value of unload rate 1 offset for the time period of
the unload rate 1 timer, a calculation of the operating CFM of the slave compressor is made. This value
is compared against the available CFM of the other
running compressors. If enough CFM is available,
then the machine stop timer is started. When it
times out, and provided there is still enough CFM
available from the remaining running compressors,
the slave compressor is stopped.
MACHINE START / STOP TIMER
• Machine start / stop timers show the time in sec that
the Master Compressor will hold before starting /
stopping slave compressor once (Start / Stop ) decision is taken. See also Walk-through of Sequencing
Loading and Unloading for further explanation of the
operation of these timers.
Status Symbols shown on Master Compressor
Sequencing menu, showing status of Slave compressors:
NOTE
Before configuring the Compressor Sequencing
table on the master compressor, log on to slave
compressors one by one and enable the sequencing
in slave mode from the Configuration screen, then
put each slave in Remote mode. Then log onto the
master compressor and wait until all slave names
show up in the Equipment List table.
CONFIGURING SEQUENCING TABLE ON MASTER
COMPRESSOR
1.
Select correct compressor name from Equipment
drop down list.
2.
Assign Priority for the slave compressor
3.
Assign Step size in percentage for the slave
compressor
4.
Assign Min/ Max capacity values for the slave
compressor
5.
Repeat steps #1-4 to configure all slave compressors.
6.
Once the sequencing table is configured, the status
for every configured compressor should show “+”
symbol.
Table B-1. Status Symbols
Slave Compressor is detected but is not configured in the sequencing
table
Default, If slave is not present
Slave Compressor is configured in sequencing table but is not configured in “Remote” mode
Slave Compressor configured in sequencing table and is in ready to run
state. You'll normally see this icon when you have initiated Compressor
Sequencing on the
Master compressor by pressing the green Unit
Start button and then the Auto Seq button
Slave Compressor is running with Alarm condition
Slave Compressor stopped due to Error Condition
Slave Compressor running at maximum capacity without any error
Slave Compressor under active control of Master Compressor
Slave Compressor running into its stop timer, will be stopped
B - 16
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Auto sequencing can be started (from the master compressor) by selecting the green Unit Start button and
pressing the “Auto Seq” button.
WALK-THROUGH OF SEQUENCING LOADING AND
UNLOADING
(Assume Suction Pressure Control)
Example:
Pressure control setpoints for setpoint 20 psig,
load rate 2 offset (outer) = 4 psig
load rate 1 offset (inner) = 2 psig
suction pressure control setpoint = 20 psig
unload rate 1 offset (inner) = 2 psig
unload rate 2 offset (outer) = 4 psig
Timers:
load rate 1 (inner) = 30 sec
load rate 2 (outer) = 20 sec
unload rate 1 (inner) = 25 sec
unload rate 2 (outer) = 20 sec
machine start timer = 120 sec
machine stop timer = 150 sec
Priorities:
Master -> slave 1 - > slave 2 - > slave 3.
Sequencing Loading mode operates in the following
way:
The slave compressors are placed into Remote mode.
The Master Compressor is started in “Auto Seq” mode.
The Master Compressor program monitors its suction
pressure value and identifies the load / unload rate band.
During loading cycle when suction pressure reaches a
value more than the configured load rate 1 offset value
(20+2 = 22 psig) and if the master compressor reaches
its Max Cap value, then the master compressor starts
machine start timer (120 sec). NOTE: The master compressor is allowed to load to 100% capacity (beyond its
Max Cap value.) Once machine start timer has elapsed,
the master then picks highest priority compressor (slave
1) from the list and starts loading compressor to the Min
Cap value for that slave. Program loads slave 1 as per
steps configured till it reaches its Max Cap value. Once
slave 1 starts running at Max Cap value and suction pressure is still not within deadband ( i.e. > load rate 1 offset
value of 20+2 = 22 psig, then program starts machine
start timer (120 sec ) for next priority compressor slave
2. This process is continued till either setpoint is achieved
or all compressors are running at their Max Cap values.
OVERVIEW OF COMPRESSOR UNLOADING
The compressor unloading scheme incorporates an intelligent algorithm to identify when it is possible to turn
a compressor off. When a slave compressor has been unloaded to its Min Cap value of capacity and the suction
pressure is still less than a value of unload rate 1 offset
for the time period of the unload rate 1 timer, then a calculation of the operating CFM of the slave compressor
is made. This value is compared against the available
CFM of the other running compressors. If enough CFM is
available, then the machine stop timer is started. When
it times out, and provided there is still enough CFM available from the remaining running compressors, the slave
compressor is stopped. Continue to example of “partial
loading of slaves, and shutting one off”.
An example of partial loading of slaves, and shutting one off:
Slave 3 – CFM (483) – running with Min Cap = 10%,
so the required CFM needed to handle slave 3 load = 483 * 10 / 100 = 48.3 CFM.
Now slave 2 is told to unload.
Slave 2 – CFM (408) – running at max cap = 90%, step = 10%
so at Interval 1 – slave 2 receives a cap hold value = 80 %,
So, the available CFM = (408 * (90 - 80) / 100) = 40.8 CFM
and the required CFM to absorb slave 3 load = 48.3 ( which is more than is available).
so at Interval 2 – slave 2 cap hold value = 70 %,
Now the available CFM = (408 * (90 - 70) / 100) = 81.6 CFM
and since the required CFM to absorb slave 3 load is = 48.3, there is now enough available and slave 3 will be
shutdown.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 17
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
In this example, during unloading cycle when suction
pressure falls below a value less than configured unload
rate 1 value (20 – 2 = 18 psig) for the time period of the
unload rate 1 timer , then the program picks the lowest
priority compressor (slave 3) from the list and starts unloading the compressor. The program unloads slave 3 as
per steps configured till it reaches its Min Cap setpoint.
Once slave 3 is unloaded to its Min Cap setpoint and
suction pressure is still not within deadband, then program picks second lowest priority compressors (in this
case slave 2 - eligible active compressor) from all running compressors list and starts unloading it. Program
unloads slave 2 (eligible active compressor) to a point
where it can handle load of active compressor (running
at min cap).
4 minutes to occur and the “Remote Comm Timeout”
message will be logged into the Event List on the slaves.
After 2nd interval it can be seen that slave 2 can handle
load of slave 3 so slave 3 can be stopped. Program then
starts machine stop timer (150 sec ) for active compressor (slave 3) and stops the same when timer is lapsed.
This process is continued till either setpoint is achieved
or all compressors are stopped.
Sync
During loading / unloading phase if the communication with any of the active / running / idle compressor
is lost then master compressor logs event for the same.
Compressor with errors / trip can be identified with its
respective status symbol. The Master compressor acts
as trim compressor.
SLAVE EXPERIENCING A FAILURE
When a slave compressor experiences an operational
failure, then that slave will be is temporarily skipped during the sequencing decisions. The slave will be placed
into a “Local” mode. The fault needs to be reset and
cleared before the compressor can be placed back into
the sequencing routine. The slave compressor can be
put back into remote mode for sequencing by pressing
Auto Start->Remote again on the slave compressor. It
will resume its “set” priority order and any future command to increase capacity of a slave compressor will result in the compressor being restarted.
1.
3.
Future Program Release
Advanced Sequence Configuration
Equalized Load Enable
• This selection on the master compressor will provide
the ability to equalize (or balance) the load between
compressors, allowing them to operate more efficiently. Rather than have one compressor operate
at 70% and another operate at 30%, the balancing
algorithm with determine a more efficient position
for all compressors online.
• This selection on the master compressor will provide
a means to broadcast all the master sequencing
parameters found on the master sequencing screen
(such as CFM, priority, step etc) to all slave compressors on the network. This will provide an easier
way to setup a different compressor so that it can
Assumptions master status when operator enables it
as the new master.
Troubleshooting
1.
If a slave compressor’s status shows this
symbol, then the operator should check if the slave
compressor is in Remote Idle mode.
2.
Check status symbols of all compressors on sequencing table.
3.
Check errors / info log on event screen.
Master experiencing a Failure
When the master compressor experiences an operational failure, then the master will continue to sequence the
slave compressors based on the setpoints that are set in
the sequencing menu of the master compressor.
2.
Power to master compressor turned off
If the power to the master compressor is turned off,
then the slave compressors that are currently being sequenced will experience a “Remote Comm Timeout”
– an indication that the slave has lost communication
to the master compressor. This takes approximately
B - 18
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Database Backup Procedure
Upgrading the program in the 20/20 panel normally involves replacing the flashcard. Note that all compressor
operation setpoints, calibration values and maintenance
information is held on the flashcard. So when upgrading
to a new program (new flashcard), the task is simplified
by using the “Database Backup” and “Database Restore”
function provided in the 20/20 to migrate the database
of the original flashcard to the new flashcard. There are
three main steps to this process:
1.
Backup the database of original flashcard (currently in the 20/20 panel) – unto a thumbdrive or
flashdrive.
2.
Replace original flashcard with new flashcard.
3.
Restore original database to new flashcard.
port is located along the right side of the single
board computer below the flashcard. (Please reference the picture in the section titled; Flashcard
Replacement Procedure Hardcopy
2.
Logon using the Vilter username and password ( =
physics)
3.
Navigate to the Data Backup screen.
4.
Under “Available Devices” – you should see something like “/media/usb0” . If you don’t see anything in this box, press the “Refresh” button, wait
about 5 seconds and then press it again.. If you
still don’t see it, then the 20/20 does not recognize
the flashdrive – try a different one. If you do see it,
highlight it.
5.
Now highlight the “Filename” box (which will also
contain “/media/usb0”). A keyboard will appear –
now type in the name of the file that you want for
your database for this compressor…. For instance…
“vss03_month_day_year” or something similar
to identify the file to the compressor – then press
“Enter” key on keyboard.
6.
Now press the SAVE button. A “watch” icon will
appear. Shortly thereafter, a popup box should
appear – telling you that the save was successful,
and asking if you want to “unmount” the flashdrive
device. Press YES. If the “watch” icon doesn’t go
away after a minute or so, then the 20/20 isn’t able
to close the backup file it has written to the thumbdrive. Power down the 20/20 and try the procedure with a different thumbdrive.
BACKUP DATABASE OF ORIGINAL FLASHCARD
NOTE
It is REQUIRED to re-enter the Alarms and Trip settings
by “hand” when upgrading from some older version
of programs, therefore it is highly recommended
to create a “hardcopy” of all compressor operating
setpoints.
It is also recommended that for documentation
purposes, a “hardcopy” of all compressor
operation setpoints, configuration information and
maintenance information be made prior to changing
flashcards. Please reference the document, titled
“Flashcard Replacement Procedure – Hardcopy” for
a list of the information that you should record.
The data migration procedure (moving the original flashcard database to new flashcard) uses a “thumbdrive” or
“flashdrive” to transfer data from the original flashcard
to the new flashcard. Note that there have been a few reports of some thumbdrives not being recognized by the
20/20. If you have difficulty in getting the 20/20 to recognize the thumbdrive – then try a different one. Vilter
have successfully tested a number of different manufacturers and sizes; a partial list is below;
SanDisk micro cruzer 2.0GB
Imation 2.0GB
Kingston DataTraveler 512MB
SanDisk mini cruzer 128MB
AirBus 32MB
1.
With the original flashcard installed into the 20/20
SBC, insert the flashdrive into the USB port. This
REPLACE ORIGINAL FLASHCARD WITH NEW
FLASHCARD
Now that the database file has been saved to the thumbdrive – the “original” flashcard can be replaced with the
new flashcard.
1.
Power the 20/20 down, remove the thumbdrive
and take out the “original” flashcard and install the
new one.
2.
Label both the old and new card to identify the
compressor it is for.
RESTORE ORIGINAL DATABSE TO NEW
FLASHCARD
Now that the new card is inserted, power the 20/20 panel back up. As the 20/20 boots up, a message may appear indicating that an “incompatibility” has been found.
This is NORMAL. The new flashcards are built such that
they recognize a couple of different single board computers. Upon bootup – the cards are automatically configured properly for the correct single board computer
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 19
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
that is identified. After seeing this message, it will take a
minute or so before the 20/20 boots up properly.
1.
Once the 20/20 panel is booted back up, Press the
“USER ACCESS” button – which is the new wording for the Logon button. Logon. Now insert the
thumbdrive back into the USB port.
2.
Navigate to the Data Backup screen. You should
again see the USB thumbdrive listed under the
“Available Devices.”
3.
Select the LOAD function (above the “Available
Devices” field), and then highlight the device that is
listed in the “Available Devices” window.
4.
To the right of the “Available Devices” – is a “Select
Folder/File” window. In this window, find the backup file for this compressor, and highlight it. Now
press the “Load” button.
a.
A popup window will appear – saying “Loading
new databases will require a program restart.
Continue?”. Press YES.
b.
Another popup window may appear… stating something like “One or more settings
selected for loading were missing from the
archive…. And it will then list what is missing.
Continue loading anyway? Press “Yes”.
5.
Another popup box may appear – asking if you
want to use the IP address it found. Press “OK”
6.
A popup box will appear saying “Settings were successfully loaded. Program will restart.” Press OK
button.
Trip setpoint set at 3.1“hg. When the value is restored, it will be restored as + 3.1 PSIG. You’ll need
to re-enter this setpoint as minus 1.5 psig (which
correlates to 3.1 inches of Hg.). Do this for any
setpoint that was originally set as “inches of Hg.”
• If you have communication connection issues after
restoring the database, you may have to “re-enter”
the IP address that is shown on page 1 of the configuration screen. If you experience communication problems after the “Restore” function – then
re-enter you communication settings.
• Navigate to the Maintenance screen and look at the
“Time Remaining” column – comparing that calculation against the “Maintenance Interval Hours” and
the actual runtime of the compressor. If the calculation isn’t correct, then do the following;
• Navigate to the Configuration screen – page 1
and re-enter the compressor “run hours” – located along the top right of the screen.
• Once you do that, then press the “APPLY”
button, wait about 10 or 15 seconds. Then
cycle power on the panel. This will force the
Maintenance “Time Remaining” column to be
properly calculated.
When the OK button is pressed, the panel will reboot.
Now – using the “hand documented” settings that you
recorded, compare the setpoints on that list against
those in the 20/20. They should all be OK. Here are the
KNOWN issues that we have found with this procedure.
• The Alarm and Trip setpoints MAY need to be reentered. Early version programs actually saved two
Alarm and Trip setpoints tables onto the old flashcard, and when saving the tables to the thumbdrive
during the Database backup procedure, the old program backed up the wrong table to the thumbdrive.
When a database “restore” (load) procedure is done
with the new program, the new program recognizes
that the Alarm and Trip tables are not correct, and
refuses to restore them. In this case, you’d need to
re-enter your Alarm and Trip setpoints manually.
• If you have any setpoint (including Alarms and Trips
and Control settings) that is in “ inches of vacuum”
– that value will be restored as a “positive PSIG” setpoint. That is a known bug of the “Restore” function.
So, for instance, say you have the Suction Pressure
B - 20
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Flashcard Replacement Procedure
12. Compressor Runtime.
Before powering down to replace the flashcard, copy
down all of the follow operating setpoints and configuration information.
REPLACE FLASH CARD
1.
Remove power from Vission 20/20 panel.
RECORD OPERATING SETPOINTS AND
CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
2.
Remove old flashcard and install new flashcard and
power panel back up.
1.
Configuration Screen - Page 1
a.
Order number
(Refer to Figure B-9)
RE-ENTER OPERATING SETPOINTS AND
CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
b. Active Remote Control Setting
1.
Log on as “admin” user (default password = admin).
c.
2.
Re-enter all values in Configuration screen. Of most
importance, is to re-enter the correct compressor
type, model and refrigerant. Re-enter Compressor
Runtime on page 1 of the configuration screen.
Make sure you re-select any optional boards that
are installed, and apply those additions.
3.
Re-enter all Control Limits
4.
Re-enter all Alarm and Trip setpoints. Of most importance - under the “Delay” tab, enter 5 seconds
for all alarm and trip delays.
d. Oil Cooling type
5.
Re-enter all Timer Setpoints
e.
6.
Re-enter all Instrument Calibration offsets for pressure transducers. Insure that the Suction Pressure
transducer range is properly selected (typically
0-200psia 4-20ma) – but double check proper setting. In Misc page – re-enter C/T Ratio.
7.
Re-enter Maintenance Notes if desired.
8.
You do not need to recalibrate the capacity and volume actuators.
If Active Remote Control = Direct I/O, document “type” of Direct I/O selection.
d. Ethernet IP settings
e.
2.
Anti-Recycle Settings
Configuration Screen - Page 2
a.
Compressor Type, Model, Refrigerant
b. Compressor Control Type & number of
Controllers
c.
3.
Motor Current Device
Configuration Screen - page 3
a.
4.
Oil Pump selection
Optional Function Selections
4. Configuration Screen - Page 6
a.
Optional I/O boards
5.
Compressor Control Setpoints – all
6.
Alarms and Trips Setpoints – all
7.
Timer Setpoints – all
8.
Instrument Calibration - Pressure page
a.
Record Transducer Range selection for suction
pressure, discharge pressure, filter inlet pressure, oil manifold pressure.
b. Record ‘total offset” value for suction pressure, discharge pressure, filter inlet pressure,
oil manifold pressure
9.
Revisions:
• R1-5/25/10 – added notes to insure that optional boards are re-selected after new flashcard is
installed.
• R2 – 6/28/10 – added note to indicate recalibration
of actuators is unnecessary.
Instrument Calibration - Temperature page
a.
Record ‘total offset’ for suction temperature,
discharge temperature, oil separator temperature, oil manifold temperature and process
temperature.
10. Instrument Calibration - Misc page
a.
Record current transformer ratio
11. Maintenance Notes –all
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 21
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-9. Flashcard Replacement
B - 22
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Danfoss Liquid Injection Valve Setup
NOTE
Consult the VSS / VSM / VSR Unit Manual for proper Danfoss ICM valve setup procedure.
Figure B-10. Configuration Screen - Page 2 (Oil Cooling section)
Figure B-11. Compressor Control Menu - Page 4 (Liquid Injection settings)
The Danfoss Liquid Injection valve is selected from the Configuration Screen - Page 2 (Under Oil Cooling Section.)
The settings for the Danfoss Liquid Injection are setup in the Compressor Control Menu - Page 4.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 23
B - 24 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
User Access Menu
This menu allows the operator to assign user accounts. The 20/20 will be shipped with a Level 3 operator and password pre-assigned to the installing contractor. He can then assign all users with security levels as needed.
The procedure to assign user access levels is to first press the User Access button. The User Access screen will appear
with the preassigned level 3 operator name visible within the Operators section. Highlight the name, then enter the
password associated with that name of the user, then press Enter key to close the keyboard. Then press “Apply” button. Press the “Manage Accounts” tab to begin the process of entering another Operator name, and assigning password and user level of this additional user. Last – remember to press the Add/Update button to add this user to the list,
then press the “Apply” button before exiting the Logon screen to make this change permanent.
Use the information below to determine the user level assignments.
Level 0
Actions
Note
elementary control.
No password associated with this level.
(Allowed to view all screens that are enabled.)
Level 1
operator level
low level user
Level 2
operator level
advanced user
Level 3
full access
supervisor
Level 0 user level (no login required) has the ability to start and stop the compressor and change the operating setpoint within the minimum and maximum settings defined by the supervisor. He can not change any alarm and trip
setpoints or timer setpoints.
Page
User Level
Note
Event list
level 0
View
Input/output states
level 0
View/create freeze screen
Trend chart
level 0
View/operate
Slide calibration
level 3
Instrument calibration
level 2
Service options
level 2
Condenser control
level 1
Setpoints can be modified / set at Level 1
Compressor sequencing level 1
Setpoints can be modified / set at Level 1
Compressor scheduling level 2
Timer
Setpoints (page 1)
level 2
Setpoints (page 2)
level 2
Constraints
level 3
Alarms trips
Setpoints
level 2
Constraints
level 3
Delay
level 3
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 25
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Compressor Control
Control setpoint
level 0
Set/Change/Modify within supervisor set constraints
All control setpoints
level 1
All remaining control setpoints are modifiable in level 1
Proportional band
level 1
Deadband
level 1
Interval/pulse time
level 1
Auto-cycle setpoints
level 1
Enable/Disable and modify all setpoints
Pumpdown setpoints
level 1
Enable/Disable and modify all setpoints
Pulldown setpoints
level 1
Enable/Disable and modify all setpoints
Constraints
level 3
Configuration
Page 1
level 2
Page 2
level 2
Page 3
level 3
Page 4
level 3
Page 5
level 3
Page 6
level 3
Set language
level 2
Help
level 0
Maintenance
level 1
Run hours needs to be level 3
Data Backup
To save data
level 1
To upload date
level 3
Start compressor
level 0
Stop compressor
level 0
Volume slide move
level 3
B - 26
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Remote Control and Monitoring of
20/20 Panel
INTRODUCTION
This document provides the reader with guidelines to
successfully communicate to and integrate with the
Vilter 20/20 control panel.
• Manhattan P/N M3477 (individually shielded with
overall shield)
• Manhattan P/N M39251 (individually shielded with
overall shield)
Three-Pair
• Belden P/N 8103 (with overall shield)
• Belden P/N 9730 (individually shielded)
NETWORKING
The Vission 20/20 directly supports two different hardware networks;
a.
Ethernet – supporting Modbus TCP and
Ethernet I/P protocols
b. RS485 – supporting serial Modbus RTU
protocol
• Belden P/N 8163 (individually shielded with overall
shield)
• Manhattan P/N M3476 (individually shielded with
overall shield)
• Manhattan P/N M39250 (individually shielded with
overall shield)
Two-Pair
COMMUNICATION WIRE
• Belden P/N 8102 (with overall shield)
For any communication network to work properly, it is
important to use the proper wire.
• Belden P/N 9729 (individually shielded)
ETHERNET CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
• Manhattan P/N M3475 (individually shielded with
overall shield)
Category 6 cable is recommended. Many installations
are now using gigahertz switches, and category 6 provides greater immunity to signal crosstalk.
• Belden P/N 8162 (individually shielded with overall
shield)
• Manhattan P/N M39249 (individually shielded with
overall shield)
RS-422/485 CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
The following cables are recommended for RS-422/485
serial communications. Although you may elect to
use other cables, keep in mind that low capacitance
(less than 15 pF/ft.) is important for high-speed digital
communication links. The cables listed below are all
24-gauge, 7x32 stranded, with 100-ohm nominal impedance and a capacitance of 12.5 pF/ft.
Select from the following four-, three-, and two-pair
cables, depending on your application needs. All will
yield satisfactory results. It is recommended that you
choose a cable with one more pair than your application
requires.
Use one of the extra wires, rather than the shield, for the
common.
Four-Pair
• Belden P/N 8104 (with overall shield)
• Belden P/N 9728 (individually shielded)
• Belden P/N 8164 (individually shielded with overall
shield)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 27
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-12. Serial Communication Ports on Single Board Computer
P12 = RS485 Serial Modbus RTU connector *
P14, P18 = USB Serial Modbus RTU connectors
P8 = Ethernet RJ45 connector
The 20/20 offers two solutions for serial communications. The first option is connector P12 which uses traditional serial UART hardware. The second option uses the USB ports, P14 or P18. These ports require the use of
an inexpensive, industrial USB to RS422/RS485 convertor. Vilter can supply these, or you can purchase your own.
For serial communications, we recommend using the USB ports, first because of the robustness of the USB ports.
They also offer increased speed. The third reason is that computer manufacturers are steering serial network users to move towards using the USB ports for serial communications.
B - 28
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-13. Vission 20/20 Single Board Computer with USB to RS422/RS485 Convertor
(VPN3485C) on USB port P18
The above photo shows a typical connection for using one of the USB ports (in this case P18) for Modbus RTU
serial communications. The USB port has a USB to RS422/RS485 convertor attached to it (VPN 3485C). One side
of the convertor attaches to the USB port. The green plug of the convertor would then be connected to the RS422
or RS485 network (network wiring is not shown).
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 29
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-14. Selecting USB Port for Serial Communication
The Vission 20/20 panel allows designating the USB port to be used for serial Modbus RTU communication from
the Configuration screen. A USB device must be plugged into one of the USB ports in order for the “Serial USB”
option to appear from the drop-down box.
B - 30
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
NETWORK TOPOLOGY
USING VPN3485MS DEVICE AS A NETWORK
CONVERTOR
RS422/RS485 Networking Topology
In Figure B-16 is a typical connection wiring diagram
for using the device as an RS422 to RS485 convertor/
isolator.
Many articles have been written about the different topologies of RS422/RS485 networks. Vilter recommends
that a daisy chain topology be used for any RS422/RS485
network that incorporates a Vilter 20/20 panel as a network slave node. Refer to Figure B-15.
USING A NETWORK ISOLATOR / REPEATER
The RS422/RS485 repeater/isolator can be used to provide a device on the serial network with isolation. The
isolator/repeater suppresses surges that may be present
on the network wires, and optically isolates and converts
unbalanced lines to balanced lines. It can also act as an
RS422 to RS485 convertor while providing the same
network isolation. Vilter stocks a network repeater/isolator for the 20/20 panels – VPN 3485MS.
Figure B-15. 2-Wire Multidrop Network Using Terminating Resistors
Figure B-16. Wiring Diagram – VPN3485MS Device as RS422 to RS485 Convertor/Isolator
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 31
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
USING THE DEVICE AS A NETWORK ISOLATOR/
REPEATER
(Reference Figure B-17)
1.
A DC power supply is required to power the device
( +10vDC to +30vDC)
2.
Dip switches on each side of the device must be
configured for the baud rate of the network.
Figure B-17. Wiring Diagram – VPN3485MS Device as Network Isolator/Repeater
Table B-2. Baud Rate Selection
B - 32
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Table B-3. RS422/485 Switch Settings
Figure B-18. VPN3485MS DIN Rail Mounted
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 33
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
ETHERNET NETWORK TOPOLOGY
The configuration of the plant Ethernet network might
be dictated by the plant IT department. One common configuration is the star type topology, where a
master device will connect to a switch, and all devices
participating on the network (Vission 20/20 panels) will
also be connected to the switch. All Vission 20/20 panels would have unique static IP addresses and the master
would communicate to each.
Figure B-19. Ethernet Network Topology
B - 34
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
ADDITIONAL NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS FOR
ACCESS VIA INTERNET
There are many network configurations that will allow
access to the Vilter 20/20 panels via an internet connection. Cost and network support is a consideration when
the plant IT department has restrictions about outside
access. It is recommended to work with them to setup
an acceptable network. The configurations below are
examples only. Setup and support of these networks are
beyond the ability of Vilter.
Example 1
In Figure B-20, this example shows a PC connected to the
internet, running a program which accesses a PC within
a plant. Both computers would have a Remote Desktop
program running on them that allows the off-sight PC to
connect to the plant PC, gain control of it, and then run a
VNC program that resides on the plant PC to gain access
to the Vission 20/20 panels.
Figure B-20. Network Configuration for Access via Internet – Example 1
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 35
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Example 2
In Figure B-21, this example shows a PC connected to the
internet, running a VNC client program which accesses
the Vission 20/20 panels by specifying an IP address assigned to a company router. There would be a separate
IP address for each 20/20 panel in the plant.
Figure B-21. Network Configuration for Access via Internet – Example 2
Example 3
In Figure B-22, this example shows a PC connected
to the internet, running a VNC client program which
accesses the Vission 20/20 panels by specifying an IP address along with a router port designation. Each Vission
20/20 panel has an assigned router port.
Figure B-22. Network Configuration for Access via Internet – Example 3
B - 36
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Example 4
In Figure B-23, this example shows a hybrid network. An
off campus PC and smartphone is connected to the internet, running VNC client programs which accesses the
Vission 20/20 panels by specifying an IP address along
with a router port designation. Each Vission 20/20 panel
has an assigned router port. The company router is a
wireless router which is also forms a wired LAN network.
the VNC client application will ask for password for 20/20
panel access. Password = VVNC.
PLC REMOTE COMPRESSOR CONTROL OF VISSION
20/20
PLC remote compressor control of the Vission 20/20
panel (either via communications or hardwired) is accomplished by placing the panel into Remote mode.
SAMPLE SETUP USING A WIRELESS ROUTER
Remote Control Mode in the panel refers to two distinct
ways of controlling the compressor.
An example of an Ethernet radio transmitter is a Phoenix
Contact RAD 80211 XDB.
1.
Control via communication port. This can be accomplished through:
• Ethernet ( via Ethernet I/P or Modbus TCP/IP )
VNC CLIENTS
Smartphone runs VNC client application – connecting to
internet.
• Serial (RS485 Modbus RTU )
2.
Control via Direct I/O (Digital inputs)
Home computer runs VNC client application – connecting to the internet.
The VNC client connects to the “remote site” router
which has an outside accessible IP address. The Vission
20/20 boxes have built-in VNC servers. The Ethernet
ports on the Vission 20/20 panels would be setup for
Modbus TCP protocol. When the connection is made,
Figure B-23. Network Configuration for Access via Internet – Example 4
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 37
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
REMOTE COMPRESSOR CONTROL VIA
COMMUNICATIONS
panel, the polling rate to the 20/20 panel can’t be unlimited, it needs to be governed.
A compressor control scheme that is accomplished via
communications must follow some general rules. The
Vission 20/20 panel does not have a separate processor
to handle communications from a computer or PLC. All
tasks that the panel needs to accomplish are done by a
single processor. So when a device communicates to the
A typical compressor control scheme might look like
this:
(For communication register information, refer Table
B-4)
Figure B-24. Typical Block Diagram of a Multi-Compressor Control Scheme (1 of 4)
B - 38
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-24. Typical Block Diagram of a Multi-Compressor Control Scheme (2 of 4)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 39
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-24. Typical Block Diagram of a Multi-Compressor Control Scheme (3 of 4)
B - 40
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-24. Typical Block Diagram of a Multi-Compressor Control Scheme (4 of 4)
The actual control scheme that you use will depend upon the response of the process that you are trying to
control.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 41
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
CONFIGURATION SCREEN SETUP FOR REMOTE
CONTROL THROUGH COMMUNICATIONS
(Reference the “Communication” section of Figure B-25)
Once the port is setup properly, communication can be
established. You will be able to read from and write (see
note) to registers.
NOTE
For Ethernet control:
1.
Configure “Active Remote Control” as Ethernet.
2.
At the bottom of the column, check the “Ethernet”
box.
3.
Configure Ethernet I/P address.
4.
Select Modbus TCP or Ethernet I/P protocol
For Serial Port Modbus RTU control:
1.
Configure “Active Remote Control” as Serial
2.
Check the “Serial” box inside the “Communications”
section.
3.
Configure serial port settings (baud rate, # data
bits, # stop bits, parity) and panel ID number (which
is “node” number for Modbus RTU.)
In order to “write” to a register in the Control
Block region of Modbus registers 40500 through
40513, the Vission 20/20 panel must be placed
into “Remote” mode, by pressing the green “Unit
Start” button, and then pressing “Remote”. The
panel will be placed into “Remote” mode, which will
allow register “writes” in this region to occur. You
can write to setpoints outside this region without
placing the panel into “Remote” mode.
INTRODUCING THE REMOTE LOCK BUTTON AND
RESTART ON POWER FAILURE SELECTION
Remote Lock
• The Remote Lock Button sets the Remote Lock
condition (ON or OFF). This determines when
communication “writes” for Compressor Command
Figure B-25. Configuration screen - Page 1
B - 42
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
registers within the Modbus range of 40500 through
40513 can occur. If Remote Lock is ON, then writes
within this region cannot occur. These registers
are the compressor control registers (Start, Stop,
Caphold etc). Remote Lock is typically used to lock
out a PLC or central computer while the operator is
operating the compressor locally. The Remote Lock
button is located directly below the Compressor
STOP button. The status of Remote Lock is shown in
the upper left corner of the Main Screen.
RESTART ON POWER FAILURE
• The Vission 20/20 allows for selection of different
operations to occur after a power failure has occurred. The selections determine what mode of
operation the 20/20 will be placed after the power is
restored to the panel. This should decided upon and
setup prior to communicating to the 20/20 panel.
1.
1.
Always
2.
Never
3.
Timed
4.
Remote Lock Off
5.
Boot in Remote (Direct I/O)
Always
• If compressor was off prior to power failure, it will
stay off after power is restored.
• If compressor was running prior to power failure,
it will begin an Auto-restart sequence as soon as
power is restored.
someone walks up to the panel and presses Unit
Start-> Remote.
4.
Remote Lock Off
• The Vission 20/20 panel will boot up with the
Remote Lock OFF which will allow the panel to
accept all remote control commands, via communication, immediately after power is restored to the
panel.
5.
Boot in Remote (Direct I/O)
• The Vission 20/20 panel will boot up with the
Remote Lock OFF and be placed into REMOTE mode,
which will allow the panel to accept Direct I/O commands immediately after power is restored to the
panel.
COMMON REGISTER SETUP FOR CONTROLLING
THE VISSION 20/20 (COMPRESSOR CONTROL)
VIA COMMUNICAITONS
Register Setup and Control Scenario
• The Vission 20/20 panel first needs to be placed in
REMOTE mode before Compressor Control commands (Registers 40500 through 40513) can be
sent. To do this, press the green UNIT START button, then REMOTE.
Modbus Register 40501 - Active Remote Control
Reading this register can be used to verify the Active
Remote Control mode, which was previously setup from
the Configuration screen. Writing to this register can
change the Active Remote Control mode, however this
is not common.
• In both cases, the Remote Lock will be ON after
power is restored, which means it will not accept any
“writes” via communication, within the Compressor
Command register region, until someone walks up
to the panel and presses Unit Start-> Remote.
• 0 = None (internal local setpoints will used to control
the compressor).
2.
• 2 = Serial (serial communications via RS485 Modbus
RTU ).
Never
• The compressor will not restart after power is
restored. The Remote Lock will be ON after power
is restored, which means it will not accept any
“writes” via communication, within the Compressor
Command register region, until someone walks up
to the panel and presses Unit Start-> Remote.
3.
Timed
• 1 = Direct I/O (hardwired control - via digital inputs.
Refer to wiring diagram.)
• 3 = Ethernet (Modbus TCP or Ethernet IP
communications.)
Typically, the following registers are setup (written to)
before a “Start” command is issued to the compressor:
• The compressor WILL attempt a restart after power
is restored and the Max Restart After Power Failure
timer has timed out. The Remote Lock will be ON
after power is restored, which means it will not
accept any “writes” via communication, within
the Compressor Command register region, until
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 43
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Modbus Register 40502 - Remote Capacity
Control Selection
• 0 = Auto Capacity Control. This selection defines
that the 20/20 will control compressor capacity from
its internal Control Setpoints.
• 1 = Pulse Load/Unload. This selection defines that
the 20/20 will control compressor capacity from
contents of Pulse Load register 40504 and Pulse
Unload register 40505.
• For correlation between register content and
pulse value, see Table B4.
• 2 = Hold Capacity %. This selection defines that the
20/20 will control compressor capacity from contents of Capacity Hold % register 40506.
If Hold Capacity % is selected, then it is typical to write a
Capacity Hold value to register 40506 before the compressor is started, typically 5%, to prevent the compressor from loading immediately.
Modbus Register 40506 - Capacity Hold %
Value = 0-100
• Using a VFD with a compressor requires considering
the VFD capacity as part of the entire capacity of
the compressor. Typically, a VFD is operated from
50% to 100% speed, therefore the VFD is considered
½ the total capacity and the slide valve movement
is considered the other ½ of total capacity. When
a VFD is employed, the normal control method is
to first move the capacity slide from 0-100% when
additional refrigeration is required. When the capacity slide is at 100% and additional capacity is still
required, then the VFD is ramped up in speed. It
follows then that a Caphold value of 25% will move
the capacity slide to 50% position. A Caphold value
of 50% will move the capacity slide to 100% position.
A Caphold value of 75% will move the capacity slide
to 100% and the VFD to 50% speed... and so on.
Consideration should also be given that when moving
the capacity slide valve from 0-100%, the actual corresponding capacity of the compressor is not changing in
a linear relationship of 0-100%. The last 15% travel of the
slide valve results in a greater change of capacity than
15%. Integrators should realize that the caphold value
sent relates to slide valve “position” and not actual capacity of the compressor. For most purposes however,
assuming a linear relationship is adequate.
Hold Capacity Operation
• Capacity Hold commands define a “target” capacity
slide valve position for the compressor. The 20/20
will position the capacity slide to the “target” position. rules of this capacity hold algorithm are;
1.
If the new target is < 0.4% (full scale) away from the
current position – then don’t do anything – this is
the deadband region.
2.
If new target is > deadband region but < 10% (full
scale) away from the current position, then energize the capacity slide for a time that is proportional to the amount it is away from the new target
position. To say it another way – the further you are
away from the new target position – the longer the
slide is energized in the proper direction. This control region is called the proportional band region.
3.
If new target is > 10% (full scale) away from current
position (greater than the proportional band region) – then energize continuously.
The rate at which the capacity slide moves from 0-100%,
and the rate at which the VFD increases speed from minimum to maximum is not the same. So there are two
different capacity profiles that the integrator needs to
consider.
Modbus Register 40507 - Active Setpoint.
This register is used in conjunction with Register 40502
= 0, Auto Capacity Control mode.
1 = Setpoint #1 Active
2 = Setpoint #2 Active (note: you must enable two
setpoints from configuration screen first).
Sometimes compressors are switched from Suction
Pressure control mode to Process Temp control mode or
vise versa. This can be done via communications using
the following register.
There are mechanical properties that limit the speed at
which the capacity of the compressor can be changed.
The capacity slide actuators can only turn so fast. The
proportional change to the compressor capacity occurs
at a fixed rate.
Caphold and Operation with VFD
B - 44
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
NOTE
Both Process Temp Control and Suction
Pressure Control must both be enabled from the
Configuration screen to do this.
Modbus Register 40503 - Auto Capacity Control
Type
0 = Suction Pressure (if enabled from Configuration
screen)
1 = Process Temp (if enabled from Configuration
screen)
2 = Discharge Pressure (if enabled from Configuration
screen)
Compressor Start and Stop Commands
Modbus Register 40508 - Start Command
Configuration Screen Setup:
(Reference the “Communication” section of Figure B-24)
For Direct I/O control:
• Configure “Active Remote Control” drop-down box
to “Direct I/O”. This selection activates the Remote
Start-Stop digital input. This is the ONLY selection
that activates the Remote Start-Stop digital input.
• Below “Active Remote Control” selection box, check
the “Direct I/O”” box.
A popup “Direct I/O Control Type” box now appears.
• From the popup “Direct I/O Control Type” box,
select desired control method:
• Auto Capacity
1 = Start Compressor Command
• (Digital) Manual Capacity – comp. capacity controlled via digital increase and decrease inputs.
Four (4) minute Remote mode time-out timer
• (4-20mA) Capacity Hold – compressor capacity
controlled via Remote Caphold analog input.
• Once the compressor has been started using the
Start Command, a 4 minute timer will start. If no
further communication takes place to the 20/20
within 4 minutes, the 20/20 will be placed in Local
Auto mode, a yellow banner will be displayed on the
20/20 signifying that a “Remote Comm Time-out”
occurred, and the Event List will get populated with
a time-stamped “Remote Comm Time-out” event.
Auto Capacity
• The compressor is started and stopped from the
Remote Start/Stop input, but the compressor capacity is controlled from the internal compressor control setpoints entered in the 20/20. The Auto-cycle
setpoints can be enabled or disabled as desired.
(Digital) Manual Capacity
Modbus Register 40509 - Stop Command
1 = Stop Compressor Command
• Vission 20/20 panel will remain in Remote (Idle)
mode after a Stop Compressor command has been
issued.
Remote Control via Direct I/O (Hard-wired)
Remote Control of the compressor can also be accomplished using hard-wired inputs. These include Remote
Start-Stop digital input, Remote Increase Capacity digital input, Remote Decrease Capacity digital input, and
Remote Caphold Setpoint analog input. For communication register information, refer to Table B-4.
• The compressor started and stopped from the
Remote Start/Stop input, but the compressor capacity is controlled from the Remote Capacity Increase
and Remote Capacity Decrease digital inputs.
(4-20mA) Capacity Hold
• The compressor started and stopped from the
Remote Start/Stop input, but the compressor capacity is controlled from a 4-20mA analog signal run to
20/20. The 4-20ma signal will be proportional to
0-100% capacity hold value. For instance, 4mA = 0
percent, 12mA = 50%, and 20mA = 100%.
Hold Capacity Operation
• The Capacity Hold analog signal defines a “target”
capacity slide valve position for the compressor. The
20/20 will position the capacity slide to the “target”
position. rules of this capacity hold algorithm are;
1.
If the new target is < 0.4% (full scale) away from the
current position – then don’t do anything – this is
the deadband region.
2.
If new target is > deadband region but < 10% (full
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 45
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
scale) away from the current position, then energize the capacity slide for a time that is proportional to the amount it is away from the new target
position. To say it another way – the further you are
away from the new target position – the longer the
slide is energized in the proper direction. This control region is called the proportional band region.
3.
If new target is > 10% (full scale) away from current
position (greater than the proportional band region) – then energize continuously.
Remote Enable Output
• When the compressor is off and in Remote mode, a
REnable output will provide a signal to indicate that
the 20/20 is in a condition where it is ready to be
started. No start inhibit conditions exists, the 20/20
is not in anti-recycle mode, and there are no trips
active. If the compressor is able to be started, then
Remote Enable output will go on. When the output
is on, then closing the Remote Start/Stop input will
initiate a compressor start.
NOTE
There are mechanical properties that limit the speed at
which the capacity of the compressor can be changed.
The capacity slide actuators can only turn so fast. The
proportional change to the compressor capacity occurs
at a fixed rate.
Caphold and Operation with VFD
• Using a VFD with a compressor requires considering
the VFD capacity as part of the entire capacity of
the compressor. Typically, a VFD is operated from
50% to 100% speed, therefore the VFD is considered
½ the total capacity and the slide valve movement
is considered the other ½ of total capacity. When
a VFD is employed, the normal control method is
to first move the capacity slide from 0-100% when
additional refrigeration is required. When the capacity slide is at 100% and additional capacity is still
required, then the VFD is ramped up in speed. It
follows then that the 4-20ma Caphold signal is broken down into two parts:
• 4-12 mA = 0 -100 slide valve position
• 12-20ma = VFD minimum speed to VFD maximum speed.
Consideration should also be given that when moving
the capacity slide valve from 0-100%, the actual corresponding capacity of the compressor is not changing in
a linear relationship of 0-100%. The last 15% travel of the
slide valve results in a greater change of capacity than
15%. Integrators should realize that the caphold value
sent relates to slide valve “position” and not actual capacity of the compressor. For most purposes however,
assuming a linear relationship is adequate.
The rate at which the capacity slide moves from 0-100%,
and the rate at which the VFD increases speed from minimum to maximum is not the same. So there are two
different capacity profiles that the integrator needs to
consider.
Once the compressor has started, the state of the
Remote Enable Output is indeterminate, and has no
meaning.
CONTROL SCENARIO
Once the Configuration Screen has been configured for
the desired type of Digital I/O control the Vission 20/20
needs to be placed in REMOTE mode. To do this, press the
green UNIT START button, then REMOTE. The Remote
Start-Stop input is now active. The state of the Remote
Enable Output should be determined by the controlling
device. When it is determined to be on, then the controlling device can energize the Remote Start-Stop input.
After the compressor has started, then the compressor
capacity is controlled by the selected option. Thought
should also be given as to how the compressor will be
restarted after a power failure occurs.
RESTART ON POWER FAILURE
• The Vission 20/20 allows for selection of different
operations to occur after a power failure has occurred. The selections determine what mode of
operation the 20/20 will be placed after the power is
restored to the panel. This should decided upon and
setup prior to communicating to the 20/20 panel.
1.
1.
Always
2.
Never
3.
Timed
4.
Remote Lock Off
5.
Boot in Remote (Direct I/O)
Always
• If compressor was off prior to power failure, it will
stay off after power is restored.
• If compressor was running prior to power failure,
it will begin an Auto-restart sequence as soon as
power is restored.
• In both cases, the Remote Lock will be ON after
B - 46
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
power is restored, which means it will not accept any
“writes” via communication, within the Compressor
Command register region, until someone walks up
to the panel and presses Unit Start-> Remote.
2.
Never
• The compressor will not restart after power is
restored. The Remote Lock will be ON after power
is restored, which means it will not accept any
“writes” via communication, within the Compressor
Command register region, until someone walks up
to the panel and presses Unit Start-> Remote.
3.
Timed
• The compressor WILL attempt a restart after power
is restored and the Max Restart After Power Failure
timer has timed out. The Remote Lock will be ON
after power is restored, which means it will not
accept any “writes” via communication, within the
Compressor Command register region, until someone walks up to the panel and presses Unit Start->
Remote.
4.
Remote Lock Off
• The Vission 20/20 panel will boot up with the
Remote Lock OFF which will allow the panel to
accept all remote control commands, via communication, immediately after power is restored to the
panel.
5.
COMMUNICATION PORT SETUP
(Reference the “Communication” section of Figure B-24)
For Serial Port Modbus RTU Monitoring:
• Check the “Serial” box
“Communications” section.
inside
the
• Configure serial port settings (baud rate, # data
bits, # stop bits, parity) and panel ID number
(which is “node” number for Modbus RTU.)
For Ethernet Monitoring:
• Check the “Ethernet” box
“Communications” section.
inside
the
• Configure IP address and Subnet Mask.
• Select Protocol (Ethernet I/P or Modbus TCP/IP)
Once the port is setup properly, communication can be
established. You will be able to read from and write to
registers. In Direct I/O mode, you cannot write to registers in the Control Block region of Modbus registers
40500 through 40513.
Boot in Remote (Direct I/O)
• The Vission 20/20 panel will boot up with the
Remote Lock OFF and be placed into REMOTE mode,
which will allow the panel to accept Direct I/O commands immediately after power is restored to the
panel.
REMOTE MONITORING
• It should be noted that while the compressor is
being controlled (starting, stopping and capacity
control) via hard-wired inputs, monitoring of compressor operating parameters can still occur by using
the communication ports available in the 20/20.
Remote monitoring can be accomplished by utilizing either the Ethernet communication port (via
Ethernet I/P or Modbus TCP/IP) or the serial port (via
RS485 Modbus RTU). For communication register
information, refer to Table B4.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 47
B - 48 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Phoenix Contact PSM-ME-RS485/
RS485-P Isolator
The Phoenix Contact isolator/repeater is used to electrically isolate the RS485 signal from the network and to
improve the signal strength of the RS485 signal over
long distances. It has the added benefit of active noise
suppression since it regenerates the active signal in relation to time and amplitude. Therefore, any noise on the
signal lines into the device will not be passed through
the device onto the network. The following test shown
in Figure B-25 was setup and performed to measure the
benefits of the isolator on an RS485 serial network running Modbus RTU protocol.
NOTE
The Phoenix Contact PSM-ME repeater was powered
from the +24vDC supply from the Vission 20/20
panel in this test.
VISSION 20/20
PHOENIX CONTACT REPEATER
(PSM - ME - RS485/RS485-P)
USB/RS485
-A
+B
GND
“B” LINE IS POSITIVE
(COMPARED TO “A”)
WHEN LINE IS IDLE
TEK 2014
PROBE 1
SUPPLY POWER +24 VDC OR AC
A
B
PORT A
GND
SHD
P12
GND
PORT B
B
A
t TERMINATION RESISTORS FOR
A&B ARE ON.
A
B
JP2
(NOTE: LABELING
CONVENTION OF A & B
TERMINALS PER MAXIM,
WHICH IS IN CONFLICT OF
EIA-485 SEPCIFICATION)
t SELECT BAUD RATE SWITCHES
TO MATCH NETWORK SPEED
PROBE 2
Figure B-26. Phoenix Contact PSM-ME Isolator Test
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 49
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Test 1
The first test measured the noise on the active network WITHOUT the Phoenix Contact PSM-ME isolator
installed in the network, see Figure B-26. The Phoenix
Contact PSM-ME repeater/isolator was removed from
the circuit and the USB/RS485 convertor was wired directly to the Vission 20/20 RS485 serial port. The following screen capture from the scope shows the amount of
noise on the network signals, see Figure B-27.
Figure B-27. Network Noise
Test 2
scope shows the amount of noise on the network signals.
The second test measured the noise on the active network with the Phoenix Contact PSM-ME isolator installed
in the network. The following screen capture from the
The noise on the signal lines has been significantly reduced with the addition of the Phoenix Contact PSM-ME
isolator installed in the network.
Figure B-28. Network Noise with Phoenix Contact PSM-ME Isolator
B - 50
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Vessel Level Control Setup for 20/20
Panel
INTRODUCTION
This document provides guidelines to successfully setup
a vessel level control function in the Vilter 20/20 control panel. Vessel level control is achieved using a level
probe wired to an auxiliary analog input channel of the
20/20, thereby providing a 4-20ma signal proportional
to the vessel liquid level. Then based on the liquid level
setpoint entered into the 20/20, the analog output card
of the 20/20 will send a varying 4-20ma signal to a positioning valve, to open or close it to achieve a desired
level of liquid in the vessel.
ADDITIONAL VISSION 20/20 HARDWARE
An additional analog input card is required to sense the
4-20ma signal from the level probe.
An analog output card is required to output a 4-20ma
signal to the positioning valve, thereby increasing and
decreasing the amount of liquid being fed to the vessel.
If a level switch is installed in or on the vessel for an alarm
or trip function, then an additional digital input card will
be required as well.
SETUP
Step 1: Configuration Screen Selection of
Installed Boards
Log on and navigate to the Configuration screen, page
number 6, see Figure B-29. Insure that all boards that
are physically installed into the Vission 20/20 panel
have been selected or “checked”. You should have additional boards 8 and 10, and possibly board 4. Board
numbering starts from the left column, top to bottom
are boards 1 to 5. On the right column, top to bottom
are boards 6 to10.
Figure B-29. Selection of Installed Boards from Configuration Screen
(Configuration Screen – Page 6)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 51
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Step 2: Selection and Naming of Auxiliary Analog
Outputs used for Level Control
Navigate to page 5 of the Configuration screen and select the analog output(s) that will be used modulating
the positioning valve(s) on the vessel(s). Also provide
a name for the analog output(s). You’ll need to reference your wiring diagram to determine which analog
output(s) need to be enabled.
In the example in Figure B-30, Auxiliary #1 Analog
Output was renamed to “Chiller Level 4,20 Out” and
Auxiliary #2 Analog Output was renamed to “Condenser
Level 4,20 Out”. Referencing the wiring diagram, please
note that Aux #1 Analog Output corresponds to AO#5
on the wiring diagram, and Aux #2 Analog Output corresponds to AO#6 of the wiring diagram.
Figure B-30. Enabling and Naming Analog Outputs (Configuration Screen – Page 5)
B - 52
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Step 3: Selection and Naming of Auxiliary Analog
Inputs used for Level Control
Navigate to page 4 of the Configuration screen and select the analog inputs(s) that will be used for sensing the
4-20ma signal from the vessel(s) level probe(s). Also
provide a name for the analog input(s). You’ll need to
reference your wiring diagram to determine which analog inputs need to be enabled.
In the example in Figure B-31, Auxiliary #5 Analog Input
was renamed to “Chiller Level 4,20 Input” and Auxiliary
#6 Analog Input was renamed to “Condenser Level 4,20
Inputs”. Referencing the wiring diagram, please note
that Aux #5 Analog Input corresponds to Channel #21
on the wiring diagram and Aux #6 Analog Input corresponds to Channel #22 on the wiring diagram.
After steps 1, 2 and 3 have been completed, then press
the APPLY button and then press the CLOSE button to
exit the Configuration screen.
Continue to step 4.
Figure B-31. Enabling and Naming Analog Inputs (Configuration Screen – Page 4)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 53
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Step 4: Instrument Calibration Screen Setup of
Auxiliary Analog Inputs.
Now that the auxiliary analog inputs have been selected
and named, the scaling for the inputs needs to be setup.
Navigate to Instrument Calibration screen page 4 and
setup the auxiliary analog input(s). These inputs are
4-20ma signals and the scaling will be setup so that:
a.
The setup example shown in Figure B-32, Auxiliary #5
Analog Input was setup so that the units of the input will
readout in “percent”. At 4.0ma input, the level percentage is equal to 0.0%. At 20.0ma input, the level percentage is equal to 100.0%. Setup Auxiliary #6 analog input
in the same way.
Continue to step 5.
The units of this signal are in “percent”.
b. 4 ma signal corresponds to 0% level.
c.
20 ma signal corresponds to a 100% level.
Figure B-32. Scaling Setup for Auxiliary Analog Inputs
B - 54
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Step 5: Auxiliary I/O (Analog Inputs) Alarm and
Trip Setup
If an alarm or trip setpoint for the vessel level is desired,
then navigate to Auxiliary I/O page 3 and setup any alarm
or trip function for the vessel level.
You have the option to select:
• Alarm / Trip : Neither, Alarm Only, Trip Only, Both
• Inhibit: Checking the Inhibit box will prevent the
compressor from starting if the analog input falls
below the Low Alarm setpoint or above the Hi Alarm
setpoint. If the compressor is running while this
occurs, it will not shutdown if the “Alarm Only” function were selected (as shown below).
• In the example in Figure B-33, Auxiliary #5 and #6
Analog Inputs were setup to function as “Alarm
Only”. The alarm points have been set to 0% and
75% level. These values would need to be adjusted
for appropriate alarm values. The inhibit box was
not selected in the example above, so the compressor will start even when the analog inputs are
outside the alarm ranges shown.
• Continue to step 6.
Figure B-33. Auxiliary I/O Alarm and Trip Setup
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 55
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Step 6: Setup of Analog Output for Vessel Level
Control – PID Level Control
Navigate to Auxiliary I/O page 6 and setup analog output
control for vessel level.
Figure B-34. PID Level Control (Auxiliary I/O – Page 6)
CHILLER LEVEL CONTROL
Suppose we are trying to maintain a level of liquid in a
chiller. As the level decreases, we want to stroke a positioning valve “more open” to allow more liquid to feed
into the chiller.
In the example in Figure B-34, examine the setup of
Aux1: Chiller Level 4,20 Output - on the left side of the
screen. The “Run Always” selection box is not checked,
so the control of the positioning valve will only occur
while the compressor is running.
For the setup in Figure B-34, the Auxiliary #1 analog output signal (which is the 4-20 ma signal to the chiller Level
positioning valve ) is controlled by the Auxiliary Input
“Chiller Level 4,20 input” - which was configured in Steps
B - 56
3, 4 and 5 above. PID Control has been selected, with a
50% setpoint.
The “Trigger Input” is enabled and the trigger setpoint
is set at 50% (same as the setpoint). When the trigger
input conditions go to a “true” state ( in this case, the
trigger goes to a true state when the chiller level drops
BELOW the setpoint), only then will the auxiliary analog
output control be enabled. In the above example, when
the chiller level is above 50%, the positioning valve will
be fully closed. As it drops below 50%, then the positioning valve will begin to open.
The PID setpoints are selected so that only the P term
(gain) is being used. With these settings, the positioning
valve will be adjusted in response to the “error” from the
desired setpoint.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
With the above setting, the response of the Aux1: Chiller
Level 4,20 Output is seen to be;
% Level Input
Aux1 Analog Output
50 %
=
4 ma
(fully closed position)
45 %
=
8 ma
40 %
=
12 ma
35 %
-
16 ma
30 %
=
20 ma (fully open position)
So a 20 % change in vessel level will cause the positioning
valve to go from a closed position to fully open position.
Decreasing the gain (P term) to 12.5 (by half) – will decrease the output sensitivity to a input change. The positioning valve will be stroked from closed to full open
position over a larger swing in vessel level. When you decrease the gain by half, then the 4-20ma output signal to
the positioning valve is applied over an input range that
is doubled;
% Level Input
ANALOG OUTPUT SETUP FOR VESSEL LEVEL
CONTROL – PROPORTIONAL LEVEL CONTROL
Setting up the vessel level control using proportional
control allows you to define the exact percent opening
of the positioning valve based on the vessel level input
signal. This mode of operation for level control is not
as common since the valve opening is in direct proportion to the defined input range, and doesn’t consider a
“setpoint” or “error from setpoint”. It simply moves the
positioning valve in direct relation to the defined level
input signal. This requires a lot of testing to know what
the correct input and output range is needed to achieve
a desired level.
You can define an input range to cover the entire 0-100%
input span, or you can define a partial range – for instance 0 to 50%, see Figure B-35. The output can be the
full 4-20ma output range, or a partial range (for instance
12 to 20 ma). The input and output ranges are completely flexible. In addition, you can define an Inverse
output. The proportional control on the left is setup
such that for a 0 to 100% input, the respective output
ranges 20 ma to 4 ma (reverse acting output).
Aux1 Analog Output
50 %
=
4 ma
40 %
=
8 ma
30 %
=
12 ma
20 %
=
16 ma
10 %
=
20 ma
Now a 40 % change in vessel level will cause the positioning valve to go from a closed position to fully open
position.
CONDENSER LEVEL CONTROL
Suppose we are trying to maintain a level of liquid in a
condenser. The condenser has a sump, and as the level
in the sump increases, we want to stroke a positioning
valve “more open” ( to allow more liquid refrigerant to
drain) thereby decreasing the amount of liquid in the
condenser sump.
Reference the previous page. On the right side is the
setup for the condenser PID control. The setup is almost
the same with the exception that the trigger condition is
selected so that it goes true when the chiller level rises
above the setpoint, only then will the auxiliary analog
output control be enabled. In the above example, when
the chiller level is below 50%, the positioning valve will
be fully closed. As it rises above 50%, then the positioning valve will begin to open.
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 57
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-35. Proportional Level Control (Auxiliary I/O – Page 6)
B - 58
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
VPLUS (AC Motor) Setup Procedure for
20/20 Panel
This document provides instructions to help setup the
Vission 20/20 for VPLUS control.
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL HARDWARE
This document provides guidelines to setup AC Motor
VPLUS oil cooling system control on the Vission 20/20
panel.
In order to control the VPLUS pump motor VFD, an analog output card is required. The 4-20ma signal from the
card will be wired to the VFD and will vary the speed of
the VPLUS motor - thereby increasing and decreasing
the amount of liquid refrigerant that will be injected into
the compressor to provide oil cooling.
SCOPE
Vilter AC VPLUS oil cooling system utilizes a PID algorithm in the Vission 20/20 panel to control the speed of
the VPLUS motor. The motor speed controls the amount
of liquid refrigerant being injected into the compressor
which is used for oil cooling. Motor speed is based on
discharge temperature. As the discharge temperature
varies from the liquid injection control setpoint, a modulating 4-20ma signal wired to the AC motor VFD will adjust the speed of the motor.
HARDWARE WIRING
The analog output card needs to be wired to the VPLUS
pump VFD, see Figure B-36.
Figure B-36. Analog Output card wiring to VPLUS VFD controller
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 59
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-37. Digital Output Card Wiring to VPLUS Liquid Injection Solenoid
The liquid injection solenoid needs to be wired to Digital Output board #2, output location #5.
B - 60
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
VISSION 20/20 SOFTWARE SETUP
Step 1: Configuration Screen Selection of
Installed Boards
installed into the Vission 20/20 panel have been selected
or “checked”. You should have the additional board #10
installed (analog output board) and selected.
Log on and navigate to the Configuration screen, page
number 6. Insure that all boards that are physically
Continue to Step 2.
Figure B-38. Selection of Installed Analog Output Board (Configuration Screen – Page 6)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 61
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Step 2: Setup and selection of Oil Cooling from
page 2 of the Configuration screen
The oil cooling VPLUS algorithm must be enabled from
the configuration screen. The algorithm used for this
is the same one that is used to control the oil cooling
motorized positioning valve. Navigate to page 2 of the
Configuration screen. In the middle column, towards
the bottom of page 2 are the Oil Cooling selections, see
Figure B-39. Select “Liquid Injection” method and then
select the “Motorized Valve” selection. Note that by selecting the positioning valve algorithm, the speed of the
VPLUS motor is being controlled based on the discharge
temperature only.
Continue to step 3.
Figure B-39. VPLUS Oil Cooling Selection
B - 62
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Step 3: Setup and selection of VPLUS / Motorized
Valve Configuration.
• Setpoint : 135 deg F.
The oil cooling VPLUS control parameters must now
be setup. Navigate to the last page of the Compressor
Control settings page. Setup the Motorized Control
Valve setting as show below in Figure B-40.
• Minimum Valve Open Percent = De-selected.
• Motorized Valve Control: P = 25.0 I = 1.0 D = 4.0
• Avg. with Oil Manifold Temperature = De-selected.
• Oil Separator Temp. Override = 100 deg F.
Depending upon the size of the oil separator, the P term
may have to be adjusted to give proper response of the
4-20ma signal to the VFD for the VPLUS motor.
Figure B-40. VPLUS / Motorized Valve Control PID Parameter Setup
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 63
B - 64 / Blank
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
VPLUS (DC Motor) Setup Procedure for
20/20 Panel
INTRODUCTION
This document provides guidelines to setup a DC Motor
VPLUS oil cooling system control on the Vission 20/20
panel.
SCOPE
then sends a varying 4-20ma signal to a Dart speed control board – which varies the speed of a DC motor. The
speed of the motor controls the amount of liquid refrigerant that is injected into the compressor to provide oil
cooling.
The Vission 20/20 has oil cooling controller algorithms
built into the program, and therefore allows for removal
of the temperature controller from the VPLUS panel.
This document provides instructions to help setup the
Vission 20/20 for VPLUS control.
The Vilter standard VPLUS oil cooling system uses a
mini-temperature controller to monitor both discharge
and oil injection temperature, averages those temperatures and compares the average to a setpoint. Based on
the error from the setpoint, the temperature controller
Figure B-41. Standard VPLUS Oil Cooling System Wiring (Eliminating Temperature Controller)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 65
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-42. Temperature Controller Wiring Removed
After removing the temperature controller wiring, the wiring diagram will look like Figure B-42.
B - 66
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
HARDWARE WIRING
Interconnect wiring between the Vission 20/20 panel
and the VPLUS panel now needs to be done.
1.
First make sure that the VPLUS panel and the
Vission 20/20 panel control power comes from the
same source.
2.
Next, the Vission 20/20 analog output card must be
wired to the Dart speed controller board. The analog output that is used for this is AO#4, see Figure
B-43. Wires from AO#4 will land on wires 106 and
107, see Figure B-42.
3.
Finally, the VPLUS relay (CRV) shown in Figure B-42
must also be wired to the Vission 20/20. This relay
will be controlled by the Vission 20/20 digital output (board #2, output #5) – the liquid injection solenoid output. Run a wire from terminal 25 in the
20/20 panel to terminal 104 in the VPLUS panel, see
Figure B-43.
Figure B-43. Analog Output Card Wiring to VPLUS Dart Speed Controller (Wire 106 and 107)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 67
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Figure B-44. Digital Output Card Wiring to VPLUS CRV Relay Terminal 104
B - 68
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
VISSION 20/20 SOFTWARE SETUP
Step 1: Configuration Screen Selection of
Installed Boards
installed into the 20/20 panel have been selected or
“checked”. You should have the additional board #10
installed (analog output board) and selected.
Continue to step 2.
Logon and navigate to the Configuration screen, page
number 6. Insure that all boards that are physically
Figure B-45. Selection of Installed Boards (Configuration Screen – Page 6)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 69
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Step 2: Setup and selection of Oil Cooling from
page 2 of the Configuration screen
The oil cooling VPLUS algorithm must be enabled from
the configuration screen. The algorithm used for this
is the same one that is used to control the oil cooling
motorized positioning valve. Navigate to page 2 of the
Configuration screen. In the middle column, towards
the bottom of page 2 are the Oil Cooling selections, see
Figure B-46. Select “Liquid Injection” method and then
select the “Motorized Valve” selection. Note that by
selecting the positioning valve algorithm, the speed of
the VPLUS motor is being controlled based on the discharge temperature only. (The original VPLUS temperature controller had thermocouples that sensed both the
discharge temperature and the oil injection temperature
and then averaged those two temperatures together, in
order to control the speed of the VPLUS motor.
Continue to step 3.
Figure B-46. Oil Cooling Selection for VPLUS Oil Cooling
B - 70
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Step 2: Setup and selection of Oil Cooling from
page 2 of the Configuration screen
The oil cooling VPLUS algorithm must be enabled from
the configuration screen. The algorithm used for this
is the same one that is used to control the oil cooling
motorized positioning valve. Navigate to page 2 of the
Configuration screen. In the middle column, towards
the bottom of page 2 are the Oil Cooling selections (reference Figure 6 below). Select “Liquid Injection” method and then select the “Motorized Valve” selection.
Note that by selecting the positioning valve algorithm,
the speed of the VPLUS motor is being controlled based
on the discharge temperature only. (The original VPLUS
temperature controller had thermocouples that sensed
both the discharge temperature and the oil injection
temperature and then averaged those two temperatures together, in order to control the speed of the
VPLUS motor.
Continue to step 3.
Figure B-46. Oil Cooling Selection for VPLUS Oil Cooling
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 71
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Step 3: Setup and selection of VPLUS / Motorized
Valve Control PID parameters.
The oil cooling VPLUS control parameters must now
be setup. Navigate to the last page of the Compressor
Control settings page. Setup the Motorized Control
Valve setting as show in Figure B-47.
Depending upon the size of the oil separator, the P term
may have to be adjusted to give proper response of the
4-20ma signal to the Dart Speed controller board for the
VPLUS motor.
• Setpoint : 135 deg F.
• Motorized Valve Control: P = 25.0 I = 1.0 D = 4.0
• Minimum Valve Open Percent = De-selected.
• Avg. with Oil Manifold Temperature = De-selected.
• Oil Separator Temp. Override = 100 deg F.
Figure B-47. Setting the VPLUS / Motorized Valve Control PID Parameters
B - 72
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Vission 20/20 Communication Table
• All ENUM variables are of INT type
• ALL F-INT data types represent floating point values as INT types multiplied by 10
• All Pressures are in Psig
• All Temperatures are in Fahrenheit
• Modbus TCP addressing is PLC-style (Base 1) addressing
• On Error, Modbus TCP server only returns an error code of “Illegal Data Address”
• All registers returned (INT and F-INT) are 2-bytes long
• For Ethernet/IP, use INT data type and PLC-5 Word Range Read/Write MSG instructions
• Remote commands can’t be issued if the panel is in “Remote Lock” mode
• Pulling rates should not be less then 5 sec
• Writes to the Vission should only occur when a value needs to be changed
• Lower Range & Higher Range values mentioned are default values of Vission 20/20
• Users can modify Lower Range & Higher Range values from Vission 20/20 Panel and accordingly maintain
their own table
Table B-4. Vission 20/20 Communication Table
Ethernet
Vilter
Address
IP Address
Modbus
Address
Data
Type
0
N50:0
40001
Compressor Interlock
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
1
N50:1
40002
High Level Shutdown
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
2
N50:2
40003
Oil Level Switch #1
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
3
N50:3
40004
Oil Level Switch #2
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
4
N50:4
40005
Local / Remote
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
5
N50:5
40006
Remote Start
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
6
N50:6
40007
Remote Increase
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
7
N50:7
40008
Remote Decrease
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
8
N50:8
40009
Auxiliary 1
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
9
N50:9
40010
Auxiliary 2
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
10
N50:10
40011
Auxiliary 3
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
11
N50:11
40012
Auxiliary 4
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
12
N50:12
40013
Auxiliary 5
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
13
N50:13
40014
Auxiliary 6
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
14
N50:14
40015
Auxiliary 7
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
15
N50:15
40016
Auxiliary 8
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
Value
Mode
Lower
Range
Higher
Range
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
16
N51:0
40051
Compressor Start
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 73
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
17
N51:1
40052
Oil Pump
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
18
N51:2
40053
Capacity Increase
ENUM
19
N51:3
40054
Capacity Decrease
ENUM
20
N51:4
40055
Volume Increase
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
21
N51:5
40056
Volume Decrease
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
22
N51:6
40057
Oil Separator Heater
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
23
N51:7
40058
Trip
INT
0= OFF, 1=ON (ON
when no Trip)
Read
24
N51:8
40059
Slide Valve Setpoint #1
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
25
N51:9
40060
Slide Valve Setpoint #2
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
26
N51:10
40061
Alarm
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON (ON
when no Alarm)
Read
27
N51:11
40062
Spare
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
28
N51:12
40063
Liquid Injection Solenoid
#1
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
29
N51:13
40064
Liquid Injection Solenoid
#2
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
30
N51:14
40065
Remote Enabled
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
31
N51:15
40066
Emergency Output
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
32
N51:16
40067
Condenser Step #1
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
33
N51:17
40068
Condenser Step #2
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
34
N51:18
40069
Condenser Step #3
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
35
N51:19
40070
Condenser Step #4
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
36
N51:20
40071
Auxiliary Output #1
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
37
N51:21
40072
Auxiliary Output #2
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
38
N51:22
40073
Auxiliary Output #3
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
39
N51:23
40074
Auxiliary Output #4
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
Read
Read
Analog Inputs
40
N52:0
40100
Motor Amps
F-INT
Read
41
N52:1
40101
Suction Pressure
F-INT
Read
42
N52:2
40102
Discharge Pressure
F-INT
Read
43
N52:3
40103
Oil Filter Inlet Pressure
F-INT
Read
44
N52:4
40104
Oil Manifold Pressure
F-INT
Read
45
N52:5
40105
Economizer Pressure
F-INT
Read
46
N52:6
40106
Capacity Slide %
F-INT
Read
47
N52:7
40107
Volume Slide %
F-INT
Read
48
N52:8
40108
Suction Temperature
F-INT
Read
49
N52:9
40109
Discharge Temperature
F-INT
Read
50
N52:10
40110
Oil Separator
Temperature
F-INT
Read
51
N52:11
40111
Oil Manifold Temperature F-INT
Read
52
N52:12
40112
Process Temperature
Read
B - 74
F-INT
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
53
N52:13
40113
Chiller Inlet Temperature
F-INT
Read
54
N52:14
40114
Condenser Pressure
F-INT
Read
55
N52:15
40115
Remote Setpoint
F-INT
Read
56
N52:16
40116
Auxiliary 1
F-INT
Read
57
N52:17
40117
Auxiliary 2
F-INT
Read
58
N52:18
40118
Auxiliary 3
F-INT
Read
59
N52:19
40119
Auxiliary 4
F-INT
Read
60
N52:20
40120
Auxiliary 5
F-INT
Read
61
N52:21
40121
Auxiliary 6
F-INT
Read
62
N52:22
40122
Auxiliary 7
F-INT
Read
63
N52:23
40123
Auxiliary 8
F-INT
Read
64
N52:24
40124
Auxiliary 9
F-INT
Read
65
N52:25
40125
Auxiliary 10
F-INT
Read
66
N52:26
40126
Auxiliary 11
F-INT
Read
67
N52:27
40127
Auxiliary 12
F-INT
Read
68
N52:28
40128
Auxiliary 13
F-INT
Read
69
N52:29
40129
Auxiliary 14
F-INT
Read
70
N52:30
40130
Auxiliary 15
F-INT
Read
71
N52:31
40131
Auxiliary 16
F-INT
Read
Analog Outputs
72
N53:0
40200
Compressor VFD (mA)
F-INT
Read
73
N53:1
40201
Condenser VFD
F-INT
Read
74
N53:2
40202
Slide Valve Output
F-INT
Read
75
N53:3
40203
Liquid Injection
Motorized Valve
F-INT
Read
76
N53:4
40204
Profile VFD
F-INT
Read
77
N53:5
40205
Spare #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
4.0
20.0
78
N53:6
40206
Spare #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
4.0
20.0
79
N53:7
40207
Spare #3
F-INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
4.0
20.0
Calculated Values
80
N54:0
40250
Filter Differential Pressure F-INT
Read
81
N54:1
40251
Start Oil Pressure
F-INT
Read
82
N54:2
40252
Run Oil Pressure
F-INT
Read
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 75
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
83
N54:3
40253
Pressure Ratio
F-INT
Read
84
N54:4
40254
Volume Ratio
F-INT
Read
85
N54:5
40255
Superheat Discharge
Temp.
F-INT
Read
86
N54:6
40256
Superheat Suction Temp.
F-INT
(2nd release)
Read
87
N54:7
40257
Superheat Oil Sep. Temp.
F-INT
(2nd release)
Read
88
N54:8
40258
Compressor VFD RPM
INT
Read
N54:9
40259
Compressor Run Capacity INT
%
Read
89
N55:0
40400
Anti-Recycle Time
(Minutes)
INT
90
N55:1
40401
Compressor Status
ENUM
91
N55:2
40402
Alarm Status Word #1
WORD
Read
(See
Notes)
92
N55:3
40403
Alarm Status Word #2
WORD
Read
(See
Notes)
93
N55:4
40404
Alarm Status Word #3
WORD (Currently Unused)
Read
(See
Notes)
94
N55:5
40405
Alarm Status Word #4
WORD (Currently Unused)
Read
(See
Notes)
95
N55:6
40406
Trip Status Word #1
WORD
Read
(See
Notes)
96
N55:7
40407
Trip Status Word #2
WORD
Read
(See
Notes)
97
N55:8
40408
Trip Status Word #3
WORD
Read
(See
Notes)
98
N55:9
40409
Trip Status Word #4
WORD (Currently Unused)
Read
(See
Notes)
Statuses
B - 76
Read
"0 = Stop
1 = Stop (Remote
Ready)
2 = Running
3 = Starting
4 = Waiting"
Read
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
99
N55:10
40410
Current Run Mode
ENUM
0 = Idle
Read
1 = Waiting
2 = Starting
3 = Manual
4 = Auto (Internal
Capacity Control)
5 = Remote Auto
(Internal Capacity
Control)
6 = Remote Load/
Unload
7 = Remote Capacity
Hold %
8 = Remote Ready
(Idle)
9 = Direct I/O Auto
Capacity
10 = Direct I/O
Manual Capacity
11 = Direct I/O
Capacity Hold %
12 = Auto
Sequencing
100
N55:11
40411
Load Limiting Condition
WORD "Bit 0 = High Motor
Amps
Bit 1 = High
Discharge Pressure
Bit 2 = Low Suction
Pressure
Bit 3 = High
Discharge
Superheat"
Read
101
N55:12
40412
Oil Pump Status
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
102
N55:13
40413
Oil Pump Operation
ENUM
"0 = None
1 = Cycling
2 = Full Time
3 = Cool
Compression"
Read
103
N55:14
40414
Compressor Model
ENUM
"0 = VSR
1 = VSM
2 = VSS
3 = VRS"
Read
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 77
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
"0 = R11
1 = R12
2 = R13
3 = R22
4 = R113
5 = R114
6 = R134a
7 = R290 - Propane
8 = R404a
9 = R500
10 = R502
11 = R503
12 = R507
13 = R717
14 = R717 - Cool
Comp
15 = R744 - CO2
16 = R771
17 = R1270 Propylene
18 = Natural Gas
19 = Other"
Read
104
N55:15
40415
Refrigerant
ENUM
105
N55:16
40416
Runtime Hours (x1000)
INT
106
N55:17
40417
Runtime Hours (1-999)
INT
107
N55:18
40418
Remote Lock Mode
INT
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Read
Read
Read
Commands
108
N56:0
40500
Alarm Reset
INT
1 = Perform Reset
ReadWrite
109
N56:1
40501
Active Remote Control
ENUM
"0 = None (Local)
1 = Direct I/O
2 = Serial
3 = Ethernet"
ReadWrite
110
N56:2
40502
Remote Capacity Control
Select
ENUM
"0 = Auto Capacity
Control
1 = Pulse Load /
Unload
2 = Hold Capacity %"
ReadWrite
111
N56:3
40503
Auto Capacity Control
Type
ENUM
"0 = Suction Pressure ReadWrite
(if enabled)
1 = Process
Temperature (if
enabled)
2 = Discharge
Pressure (if enabled)"
B - 78
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
112
N56:4
40504
Remote Pulse Load
F-INT
"0 = Stop Pulse
10 = 1 Second Pulse
15 = 1.5 Second
Pulse
20 = 2 Second Pulse
…
145 = 14.5 Second
Pulse
150 = 15 Second
Pulse"
ReadWrite
113
N56:5
40505
Remote Pulse Unload
F-INT
"0 = Stop Pulse
10 = 1 Second Pulse
15 = 1.5 Second
Pulse
20 = 2 Second Pulse
...
145 = 14.5 Second
Pulse
150 = 15 Second
Pulse"
ReadWrite
114
N56:6
40506
Capacity Hold %
INT
0 – 100
ReadWrite
115
N56:7
40507
Active Setpoint
ENUM
"1 = Setpoint 1
2 = Setpoint 2 (if
enabled)"
ReadWrite
116
N56:8
40508
Start Command
INT
1 = Start
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
117
N56:9
40509
Stop Command
INT
1 = Stop
ReadWrite
118
N56:10
40510
Auto-Cycle Enable/
Disable
INT
0 = Disable, 1 =
Enable
ReadWrite
119
N56:11
40511
Pumpdown Enable/
Disable
INT
0 = Disable, 1 =
Enable
ReadWrite
120
N56:12
40512
Pulldown Enable/Disable
INT
0 = Disable, 1 =
Enable
ReadWrite
N56:13
40513
Force to local control
INT
1 = To local
ReadWrite
Compressor Control
Setpoints
122
N57:0
40550
Setpoint #1 (Pressure,
Temp)
F-INT
ReadWrite
(-15.0,
-100.0)
(200.0,
150.0)
123
N57:1
40551
Cap Inc Time Interval
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
5.5
124
N57:2
40552
Cap Inc Proportional
Band Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
20.0
125
N57:3
40553
Cap Dec Time Interval
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
5.5
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 79
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
126
N57:4
40554
Cap Dec Proportional
Band Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
20.0
127
N57:5
40555
Setpoint #2 (Pressure,
Temp)
F-INT
ReadWrite
(-15.0,
-100.0)
(200.0,
150.0)
128
N57:6
40556
Cap Inc Time Interval
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
5.5
129
N57:7
40557
Cap Inc Proportional
Band Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
20.0
130
N57:8
40558
Cap Dec Time Interval
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
5.5
131
N57:9
40559
Cap Dec Proportional
Band Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
20.0
132
N57:10
40560
Cap Inc Pulse Time
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
5.5
133
N57:11
40561
Cap Inc Dead Band
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
1.0
50.0
134
N57:12
40562
Cap Dec Pulse Time
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
5.5
135
N57:13
40563
Cap Dec Dead Band
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
1.0
50.0
136
N57:14
40564
Cap Inc Pulse Time
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
5.5
137
N57:15
40565
Cap Inc Dead Band
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
1.0
50.0
138
N57:16
40566
Cap Dec Pulse Time
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
5.5
139
N57:17
40567
Cap Dec Dead Band
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
1.0
50.0
F-INT
ReadWrite
(-15.0,
-100.0)
(200.0,
150.0)
Auto Cycle
140
N58:0
40570
Start (Press/Temp)
Setpoint #1
141
N58:1
40571
Start Delay Time Setpoint INT
#1
ReadWrite
0
300
142
N58:2
40572
Stop (Press/Temp)
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
(-15.0,
-100.0)
(200.0,
150.0)
143
N58:3
40573
Stop Delay Time Setpoint
#1
INT
ReadWrite
0
300
144
N58:4
40574
Minimum Slide Position
Setpoint #1
INT
ReadWrite
0
100
145
N58:5
40575
Start (Press/Temp)
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
(-15.0,
-100.0)
(200.0,
150.0)
146
N58:6
40576
Start Delay Time Setpoint INT
#2
ReadWrite
0
300
147
N58:7
40577
Stop (Press/Temp)
Setpoint #2
ReadWrite
(-15.0,
-100.0)
(200.0,
150.0)
B - 80
F-INT
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
148
N58:8
40578
Stop Delay Time Setpoint
#2
INT
ReadWrite
0
300
149
N58:9
40579
Minimum Slide Position
Setpoint #2
INT
ReadWrite
0
100
Pumpdown
150
N59:0
40590
Stop Pressure Setpoint #1 F-INT
ReadWrite
-15.0
200.0
151
N59:1
40591
Stop Delay Time Setpoint
#1 (seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
0
60
152
N59:2
40592
Minimum Slide Position
Setpoint #1
INT
ReadWrite
0
50
153
N59:3
40593
Stop Pressure Setpoint #2 F-INT
ReadWrite
-15.0
200.0
154
N59:4
40594
Stop Delay Time Setpoint
#2 (seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
0
60
155
N59:5
40595
Minimum Slide Position
Setpoint #2
INT
ReadWrite
0
50
156
N59:6
40596
Pumpdown Operation
INT
0 = Stop, 1 = Start
ReadWrite
Pulldown
157
N60:0
40600
Step Pressure
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.0
10.0
158
N60:1
40601
Delay Per Step (hours)
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.1
20.0
159
N60:2
40602
Stop Pressure
F-INT
ReadWrite
-15.0
200.0
160
N60:3
40603
Auto Cycle Differential
F-INT
ReadWrite
1.0
20.0
161
N60:4
40604
Initiate Pulldown at Next
Start
INT
0 = Disable, 1 =
Enable
ReadWrite
Misc 1
162
N61:0
40610
High Motor Amps Stop
Load Setpoint #1
F-INT
Read
163
N61:1
40611
High Motor Amps Force
Unload Setpoint #1
F-INT
Read
164
N61:2
40612
High Disch Press Stop
Load Setpoint #1
F-INT
Read
165
N61:3
40613
High Disch Press Force
Unload Setpoint #1
F-INT
Read
166
N61:4
40614
Low Suct Press Stop Load
Setpoint #1
F-INT
Read
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 81
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
167
N61:5
40615
Low Suct Press Force
Unload Setpoint #1
F-INT
Read
168
N61:6
40616
High Motor Amps Stop
Load Setpoint #2
F-INT
Read
169
N61:7
40617
High Motor Amps Force
Unload Setpoint #2
F-INT
Read
170
N61:8
40618
High Disch Press Stop
Load Setpoint #2
F-INT
Read
171
N61:9
40619
High Disch Press Force
Unload Setpoint #2
F-INT
Read
172
N61:10
40620
Low Suct Press Stop Load
Setpoint #2
F-INT
Read
173
N61:11
40621
Low Suct Press Force
Unload Setpoint #2
F-INT
Read
174
N61:12
40622
Liquid Inj. Solenoid #1
Temp
F-INT
Read
175
N61:13
40623
Liquid Inj. Solenoid #2
Temp
F-INT
Read
176
N61:14
40624
Liquid Inj. Open %
F-INT
Read
177
N61:15
40625
Liquid Inj. Oil Sep. Temp.
Override
F-INT
Read
178
N61:16
40626
Liquid Inj. Motorized
Valve Gain (P)
F-INT
Read
179
N61:17
40627
Liquid Inj. Motorized
Valve Reset (I)
F-INT
Read
180
N61:18
40628
Liquid Inj. Motorized
Valve Rate (D)
F-INT
Read
181
N61:19
40629
Minimum Valve Open
Enabled
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
Read
182
N61:20
40630
Avg. With Oil Manifold
Temperature
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
Read
183
N61:21
40631
High Discharge
Superheat Stop Load
Setpoint #1
F-INT
Read
184
N61:22
40632
High Discharge
Superheat Force Unload
Setpoint #1
F-INT
Read
185
N61:23
40633
High Discharge
Superheat Stop Load
Setpoint #2
F-INT
Read
186
N61:24
40634
High Discharge
Superheat Force Unload
Setpoint #2
F-INT
Read
Misc 2
187
N62:0
40640
Slide Valve Setpoint #1
INT
Read
188
N62:1
40641
Slide Valve Setpoint #2
INT
Read
B - 82
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
189
N62:2
40642
Slide Valve Setpoint #1
Enabled
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
Read
190
N62:3
40643
Slide Valve Setpoint #2
Enabled
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
Read
191
N62:4
40644
Oil Pump Press. Restart
Ratio (ON)
F-INT
Read
192
N62:5
40645
Oil Pump Press. Restart
Ratio (OFF)
F-INT
Read
193
N62:6
40646
Oil Sep. Heater Temp.
F-INT
Read
194
N62:7
40647
Volume Slide Adjustment
%
INT
Read
195
N62:8
40648
Soft Load %
INT
Read
196
N62:9
40649
Capacity Range Min %
F-INT
Read
197
N62:10
40650
Capacity Range Max %
F-INT
Read
198
N62:11
40651
Rate Deadband
F-INT
Read
199
N62:12
40652
Enable Load Anticipating
Algorithm
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
Read
Compressor VFD
200
N70:0
40670
VFD Gain (P)
INT
Read
201
N70:1
40671
VFD Reset (I)
INT
Read
202
N70:2
40672
VFD Rate (D)
INT
Read
203
N70:3
40673
Step 1 VFD Minimum
Slide Position
INT
Read
204
N70:4
40674
Step 1 VFD Maximum
Slide Position
INT
Read
205
N70:5
40675
Step 1 VFD Minimum
Speed (rpm)
INT
Read
206
N70:6
40676
Step 1 VFD Maximum
Speed (rpm)
INT
Read
207
N70:7
40677
2 Step VFD Control
Enabled
INT
208
N70:8
40678
Step 2 VFD Minimum
Slide Position
INT
Read
209
N70:9
40679
Step 2 VFD Maximum
Slide Position
INT
Read
210
N70:10
40680
Step 2 VFD Minimum
Speed (rpm)
INT
Read
211
N70:11
40681
Step 2 VFD Maximum
Speed (rpm)
INT
Read
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
Read
Cool Compression
212
N71:0
40700
Auto Load Enabled
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
213
N71:1
40701
Auto Load @ Start
INT
Read
214
N71:2
40702
Auto Load Timer (mins)
F-INT
Read
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Read
B - 83
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
215
N71:3
40703
SOI Solenoid ON
F-INT
Read
216
N71:4
40704
SOI Solenoid OFF
F-INT
Read
217
N71:5
40705
SOI Load Limit
INT
Read
218
N71:6
40706
High Press Ratio Solenoid
ON
F-INT
Read
219
N71:7
40707
High Press Ratio Solenoid
OFF
F-INT
Read
220
N71:8
40708
Start SP
F-INT
Read
221
N71:9
40709
Linear SP
F-INT
Read
222
N71:10
40710
Upper SP
F-INT
Read
223
N71:11
40711
Max SP
F-INT
Read
224
N71:12
40712
Start Level
INT
Read
225
N71:13
40713
Leakage
INT
Read
226
N71:14
40714
Overfill Leakage
INT
Read
Alarms/Trips (Page
1)
227
N63:0
40750
Low Suction Press. Alarm
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
-15.0
300.0
228
N63:1
40751
Low Suction Press. Trip
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
-15.0
300.0
229
N63:2
40752
High Disch. Press. Alarm
Setpoint #1
F-INT
Read
230
N63:3
40753
High Disch. Press. Trip
Setpoint #1
F-INT
Read
231
N63:4
40754
High Proc. Temp. Alarm
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
-100.0
210.0
232
N63:5
40755
Low Proc. Temp. Alarm
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
-100.0
210.0
233
N63:6
40756
Low Proc. Temp. Trip
Setpoint #1
F-INT
ReadWrite
-100.0
210.0
234
N63:7
40757
Low Suction Press. Alarm
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
-15.0
300.0
235
N63:8
40758
Low Suction Press. Trip
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
-15.0
300.0
236
N63:9
40759
High Disch. Press. Alarm
Setpoint #2
F-INT
Read
237
N63:10
40760
High Disch. Press. Trip
Setpoint #2
F-INT
Read
238
N63:11
40761
High Proc. Temp. Alarm
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
-100.0
210.0
239
N63:12
40762
Low Proc. Temp. Alarm
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
-100.0
210.0
240
N63:13
40763
Low Proc. Temp. Trip
Setpoint #2
F-INT
ReadWrite
-100.0
210.0
B - 84
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
Alarms/Trips
(Page 2)
241
N64:0
40800
Low Suction Temp. Alarm F-INT
ReadWrite
-100.0
210.0
242
N64:1
40801
Low Suction Temp. Trip
F-INT
ReadWrite
-100.0
210.0
243
N64:2
40802
High Disch. Temp. Alarm
F-INT
Read
244
N64:3
40803
High Disch. Temp. Trip
F-INT
Read
245
N64:4
40804
Low Oil Sep. Start Temp.
Alarm
F-INT
Read
246
N64:5
40805
Low Oil Sep. Start Temp.
Trip
F-INT
Read
247
N64:6
40806
Low Oil Sep. Run Temp.
Alarm
F-INT
Read
248
N64:7
40807
Low Oil Sep. Run Temp.
Trip
F-INT
Read
249
N64:8
40808
Low Oil Inj. Temp Alarm
F-INT
Read
250
N64:9
40809
Low Oil Inj. Temp Trip
F-INT
Read
251
N64:10
40810
High Oil Inj. Temp Alarm
F-INT
Read
252
N64:11
40811
High Oil Inj. Temp Trip
F-INT
Read
253
N64:12
40812
High Oil Separator Temp
Alarm
F-INT
Read
254
N64:13
40813
High Oil Separator Temp
Trip
F-INT
Read
255
N64:14
40814
High Superheat Start
Temp Trip
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.0
100.0
256
N64:15
40815
High Superheat Run
Temp Alarm
F-INT
ReadWrite
21.0
23.0
257
N64:16
40816
High Superheat Run
Temp Trip
F-INT
ReadWrite
24.0
26.0
258
N64:17
40817
High Superheat Start
Offset Temp
F-INT
ReadWrite
4.0
6.0
Alarms/Trips
(Page 3)
259
N65:0
40830
Prelube Oil Pressure
Alarm
F-INT
Read
260
N65:1
40831
Prelube Oil Pressure Trip
F-INT
Read
261
N65:2
40832
Run Oil Pressure Alarm
F-INT
Read
262
N65:3
40833
Run Oil Pressure Trip
F-INT
Read
263
N65:4
40834
High Filter Diff. Start
Press. Alarm
F-INT
Read
264
N65:5
40835
High Filter Diff. Start
Press. Trip
F-INT
Read
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 85
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
265
N65:6
40836
High Filter Diff. Run Press. F-INT
Alarm
Read
266
N65:7
40837
High Filter Diff. Run Press. F-INT
Trip
Read
267
N65:8
40838
High Motor Amps Alarm
F-INT
Read
268
N65:9
40839
High Motor Amps Trip
F-INT
Read
269
N65:10
40840
Low Run Pressure Ratio
Alarm
F-INT
ReadWrite
1.4
4.9
270
N65:11
40841
Low Run Pressure Ratio
Trip
F-INT
ReadWrite
1.4
4.9
Timers
271
N66:0
40900
Capacity Increase Start
Delay (seconds)
INT
Read
272
N66:1
40901
Minimum Comp. Prelube
Time (seconds)
INT
Read
273
N66:2
40902
Low Oil Press. Safety
Changeover (seconds)
INT
Read
274
N66:3
40903
High Filter Diff. Safety
Changeover (seconds)
INT
Read
275
N66:4
40904
Compressor Interlock
Bypass (seconds)
INT
Read
276
N66:5
40905
Low Oil Sep. Temp Safety
Changeover (minutes)
INT
Read
277
N66:6
40906
Low Oil Injection Safety
Changeover (minutes)
INT
Read
278
N66:7
40907
High Motor Amps Safety
Changeover (seconds)
INT
Read
279
N66:8
40908
Max Restart Time After
Power Failure (minutes)
INT
ReadWrite
1
120
280
N66:9
40909
Hot Starts Per Hour
INT
ReadWrite
1
5
281
N66:10
40910
True Anti-Recycle Timer
(minutes)
INT
ReadWrite
12
480
282
N66:11
40911
Accumulative AntiRecycle Timer (minutes)
INT
ReadWrite
12
480
283
N66:12
40912
Oil Level #1 Safety Trip
Delay (seconds)
INT
Read
284
N66:13
40913
Oil Level #2 Safety Trip
Delay (seconds)
INT
Read
285
N66:14
40914
Low Pressure Ratio
Bypass (seconds)
INT
Read
286
N66:15
40915
Emergency Stop Timer
(minutes)
INT
Read
287
N66:16
40916
Low Suction Pressure
Safety Bypass (seconds)
INT
Read
B - 86
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
288
N66:17
40917
High Superheat Temp
Safety Changeover
(minutes)
INT
Read
Compressor
Scheduling (Military
Time)
289
N67:0
41000
Sunday Event #1 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
290
N67:1
41001
Sunday Event #1 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
291
N67:2
41002
Sunday Event #1 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
292
N67:3
41003
Sunday Event #2 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
293
N67:4
41004
Sunday Event #2 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
294
N67:5
41005
Sunday Event #2 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
295
N67:6
41006
Sunday Event #3 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
296
N67:7
41007
Sunday Event #3 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
297
N67:8
41008
Sunday Event #3 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
298
N67:9
41009
Sunday Event #4 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 87
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
299
N67:10
41010
Sunday Event #4 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
300
N67:11
41011
Sunday Event #4 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
301
N67:12
41012
Monday Event #1 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
302
N67:13
41013
Monday Event #1 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
303
N67:14
41014
Monday Event #1 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
304
N67:15
41015
Monday Event #2 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
305
N67:16
41016
Monday Event #2 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
306
N67:17
41017
Monday Event #2 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
307
N67:18
41018
Monday Event #3 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
308
N67:19
41019
Monday Event #3 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
309
N67:20
41020
Monday Event #3 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
310
N67:21
41021
Monday Event #4 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
B - 88
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
311
N67:22
41022
Monday Event #4 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
312
N67:23
41023
Monday Event #4 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
313
N67:24
41024
Tuesday Event #1 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
314
N67:25
41025
Tuesday Event #1 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
315
N67:26
41026
Tuesday Event #1 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
316
N67:27
41027
Tuesday Event #2 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
317
N67:28
41028
Tuesday Event #2 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
318
N67:29
41029
Tuesday Event #2 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
319
N67:30
41030
Tuesday Event #3 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
320
N67:31
41031
Tuesday Event #3 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
321
N67:32
41032
Tuesday Event #3 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
322
N67:33
41033
Tuesday Event #4 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 89
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
323
N67:34
41034
Tuesday Event #4 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
324
N67:35
41035
Tuesday Event #4 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
325
N67:36
41036
Wednesday Event #1
Control Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
326
N67:37
41037
Wednesday Event #1
Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
327
N67:38
41038
Wednesday Event #1
Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
328
N67:39
41039
Wednesday Event #2
Control Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
329
N67:40
41040
Wednesday Event #2
Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
330
N67:41
41041
Wednesday Event #2
Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
331
N67:42
41042
Wednesday Event #3
Control Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
332
N67:43
41043
Wednesday Event #3
Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
333
N67:44
41044
Wednesday Event #3
Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
334
N67:45
41045
Wednesday Event #4
Control Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
B - 90
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
335
N67:46
41046
Wednesday Event #4
Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
336
N67:47
41047
Wednesday Event #4
Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
337
N67:48
41048
Thursday Event #1
Control Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
338
N67:49
41049
Thursday Event #1 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
339
N67:50
41050
Thursday Event #1 Minute INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
340
N67:51
41051
Thursday Event #2
Control Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
341
N67:52
41052
Thursday Event #2 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
342
N67:53
41053
Thursday Event #2 Minute INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
343
N67:54
41054
Thursday Event #3
Control Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
344
N67:55
41055
Thursday Event #3 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
345
N67:56
41056
Thursday Event #3 Minute INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
346
N67:57
41057
Thursday Event #4
Control Mode
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
ENUM
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 91
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
347
N67:58
41058
Thursday Event #4 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
348
N67:59
41059
Thursday Event #4 Minute INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
349
N67:60
41060
Friday Event #1 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
350
N67:61
41061
Friday Event #1 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
351
N67:62
41062
Friday Event #1 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
352
N67:63
41063
Friday Event #2 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
353
N67:64
41064
Friday Event #2 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
354
N67:65
41065
Friday Event #2 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
355
N67:66
41066
Friday Event #3 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
356
N67:67
41067
Friday Event #3 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
357
N67:68
41068
Friday Event #3 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
358
N67:69
41069
Friday Event #4 Control
Mode
ENUM
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
B - 92
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
359
N67:70
41070
Friday Event #4 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
360
N67:71
41071
Friday Event #4 Minute
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
361
N67:72
41072
Saturday Event #1 Control ENUM
Mode
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
362
N67:73
41073
Saturday Event #1 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
363
N67:74
41074
Saturday Event #1 Minute INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
364
N67:75
41075
Saturday Event #2 Control ENUM
Mode
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
365
N67:76
41076
Saturday Event #2 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
366
N67:77
41077
Saturday Event #2 Minute INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
367
N67:78
41078
Saturday Event #3 Control ENUM
Mode
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
368
N67:79
41079
Saturday Event #3 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
369
N67:80
41080
Saturday Event #3 Minute INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
370
N67:81
41081
Saturday Event #4 Control ENUM
Mode
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
6
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 93
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
371
N67:82
41082
Saturday Event #4 Hour
INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
23
372
N67:83
41083
Saturday Event #4 Minute INT
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
0
59
373
N67:84
41084
Comp Schedule Enable/
Disable
INT
0 = Disable, 1 =
Enable
ReadWrite
(See
Notes)
Compressor
Sequencing
374
N68:0
41100
Control Setpoint
(Pressure, Temp)
F-INT
Read
375
N68:1
41101
Load Rate 1 offset
(Pressure, Temp)
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.0
100.0
376
N68:2
41102
Load Rate 2 offset
(Pressure, Temp)
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.0
100.0
377
N68:3
41103
Unload Rate 1 offset
(Pressure, Temp)
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.0
100.0
378
N68:4
41104
Unload Rate 2 offset
(Pressure, Temp)
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.0
100.0
379
N68:5
41105
Load Rate 1 Timer
(Pressure, Temp)
(seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
0
10000
380
N68:6
41106
Load Rate 2 Timer
(Pressure, Temp)
(seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
0
10000
381
N68:7
41107
Unload Rate 1 Timer
(Pressure, Temp)
(seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
0
10000
382
N68:8
41108
Unload Rate 2 Timer
(Pressure, Temp)
(seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
0
10000
383
N68:9
41109
Machine Start Time
(seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
0
10000
384
N68:10
41110
Machine Stop Time
(seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
0
10000
Condenser Control
385
N69:0
41170
Run Mode
ENUM
"0 = Run Never
1 = Run With Comp
2 = Run Always
3 = Manual"
ReadWrite
386
N69:1
41171
Profile
ENUM
"0 = Summer
1 = Winter"
ReadWrite
B - 94
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
387
N69:2
41172
High to Low Speed Fan
Delay (seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
5
30
388
N69:3
41173
Condenser Setpoint
F-INT
ReadWrite
100.0
150.0
389
N69:4
41174
Upper Deadband
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
20.0
390
N69:5
41175
Lower Deadband
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
20.0
391
N69:6
41176
Wetbulb Offset
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.5
20.0
392
N69:7
41177
Switch Temp
F-INT
ReadWrite
25.0
45.0
393
N69:8
41178
Summer/Winter Auto
Switch Enabled
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
394
N69:9
41179
Wetbulb Override
Enabled
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
395
N69:10
41180
Step #1 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
396
N69:11
41181
Step #2 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
397
N69:12
41182
Step #3 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
398
N69:13
41183
Step #4 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
399
N69:14
41184
Step #5 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
400
N69:15
41185
Step #1 Out#1 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
401
N69:16
41186
Step #2 Out#1 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
402
N69:17
41187
Step #3 Out#1 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
403
N69:18
41188
Step #4 Out#1 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
404
N69:19
41189
Step #5 Out#1 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
405
N69:20
41190
Step #1 Out#2 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
406
N69:21
41191
Step #2 Out#2 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
407
N69:22
41192
Step #3 Out#2 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
408
N69:23
41193
Step #4 Out#2 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
409
N69:24
41194
Step #5 Out#2 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
410
N69:25
41195
Step #1 Out#3 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 95
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
411
N69:26
41196
Step #2 Out#3 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
412
N69:27
41197
Step #3 Out#3 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
413
N69:28
41198
Step #4 Out#3 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
414
N69:29
41199
Step #5 Out#3 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
415
N69:30
41200
Step #1 Out#4 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
416
N69:31
41201
Step #2 Out#4 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
417
N69:32
41202
Step #3 Out#4 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
418
N69:33
41203
Step #4 Out#4 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
419
N69:34
41204
Step #5 Out#4 Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
420
N69:35
41205
Step #1 VFD Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
421
N69:36
41206
Step #2 VFD Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
422
N69:37
41207
Step #3 VFD Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
423
N69:38
41208
Step #4 VFD Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
424
N69:39
41209
Step #5 VFD Enabled
(Summer, Winter)
INT
0 = Disabled, 1 =
Enabled
ReadWrite
425
N69:40
41210
Step#1 Step Delay
(Summer, Winter)
(seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
5
60
426
N69:41
41211
Step#2 Step Delay
(Summer, Winter)
(seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
5
60
427
N69:42
41212
Step#3 Step Delay
(Summer, Winter)
(seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
5
60
428
N69:43
41213
Step#4 Step Delay
(Summer, Winter)
(seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
5
60
429
N69:44
41214
Step#5 Step Delay
(Summer, Winter)
(seconds)
INT
ReadWrite
5
60
430
N69:45
41215
Step #1 Low Speed Fan
(Summer, Winter)
ENUM
B - 96
"0 = None
1 = Out # 1
2 = Out # 2
3 = Out # 3
4 = Out # 4"
Read
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
431
N69:46
41216
Step #2 Low Speed Fan
(Summer, Winter)
ENUM
"0 = None
1 = Out # 1
2 = Out # 2
3 = Out # 3
4 = Out # 4"
Read
432
N69:47
41217
Step #3 Low Speed Fan
(Summer, Winter)
ENUM
"0 = None
1 = Out # 1
2 = Out # 2
3 = Out # 3
4 = Out # 4"
Read
433
N69:48
41218
Step #4 Low Speed Fan
(Summer, Winter)
ENUM
"0 = None
1 = Out # 1
2 = Out # 2
3 = Out # 3
4 = Out # 4"
Read
434
N69:49
41219
Step #5 Low Speed Fan
(Summer, Winter)
ENUM
"0 = None
1 = Out # 1
2 = Out # 2
3 = Out # 3
4 = Out # 4"
Read
435
N69:50
41220
Condenser VFD Gain (P)
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.0
10.0
436
N69:51
41221
Condenser VFD Reset (I)
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.0
10.0
437
N69:52
41222
Condenser VFD Rate (D)
F-INT
ReadWrite
0.0
10.0
438
N69:53
41223
Condenser VFD Minimum INT
Speed (%)
ReadWrite
0
20
439
N69:54
41224
Condenser VFD
Maximum Speed (%)
ReadWrite
80
100
INT
Configuration
(Time)
440
N76:0
41330
Time – Hours
INT
(HH)
ReadWrite
0
23
441
N76:1
41331
Time – Min
INT
(MM)
ReadWrite
0
59
442
N76:2
41332
Time – Secs
INT
(SS)
ReadWrite
0
59
443
N76:3
41333
Date – Year
INT
(YYYY)
ReadWrite
1970
2037
444
N76:4
41334
Date – Month
INT
(1-12)
ReadWrite
1
12
445
N76:5
41335
Date – Day
INT
(1-31)
ReadWrite
1
31
Configuration
(Other)
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 97
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
446
N77:0
41340
Anti-Recycle
ENUM
"0 = True AntiRecycle
1 = Accumulative
Anti-Recycle
2 = Hot Starts"
Read
447
N77:1
41341
Restart On Power Fail
ENUM
"0 = Always
1 = Never
2 = Timed
3 = Remote Lock Off
4 = Boot in Remote
(Direct I/O)"
ReadWrite
448
N77:2
41342
Suction Press. Control
Available
INT
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
449
N77:3
41343
Suction Press. Control #
of Setpoints
INT
450
N77:4
41344
Process Temp. Control
Available
INT
451
N77:5
41345
Process Temp. Control #
of Setpoints
INT
452
N77:6
41346
% Slide Volume Position
INT
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
453
N77:7
41347
Economizer Pressure
INT
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
454
N77:8
41348
Compressor VFD
INT
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
455
N77:9
41349
Compressor Sequencing
INT
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
456
N77:10
41350
Superheat Monitor
INT
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
457
N77:11
41351
Oil Pump Control Type
ENUM
"0 = No Pump
1 = Cycling
2 = Full Time
3 = Cool
Compression"
Read
458
N77:12
41352
# Oil Pumps
INT
459
N77:13
41353
Condenser Control
INT
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
460
N77:14
41354
Ambient Sensor
INT
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
461
N77:15
41355
Wetbulb Sensor
INT
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
462
N77:16
41356
Condenser VFD
INT
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
463
N77:17
41357
Oil Cooling Type
ENUM
"0 = Thermosyphon
1 = H2O Oil Cooler
2 = Liquid Injection
3 = Cool
Compression"
Read
464
N77:18
41358
Liquid Injection Type
ENUM
"0 = Solenoids
1 = Motorized Valve"
Read
465
N77:19
41359
# Liquid Injection
Solenoids
INT
N77:20
41360
Discharge Press. Control
Available
INT
B - 98
Read
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
Read
Read
Read
0 = No, 1 = Yes
Read
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
N77:21
41361
Discharge Press. Control
# of Setpoints
INT
Read
NOTES
• Analog Outputs: spare1 / spare2 / spare3 – send a floating point value between 4.0 and 20.0 to drive a 4-20 mA
signal output (assumes proper calibration)
• Statuses: Alarm Status Word(s) – currently only 17 alarms, so only Alarm Status Word 1 and 2 are used, with each
position indicating an alarm (MSB to LSB [Bit 15, Bit 14, Bit 13, ... Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1, Bit 0]):
Word 1
Word 2
Bit 0 = Low Oil Pressure Alarm
Bit 0 = High Oil Separator
Temp. Alarm
Bit 1 = Add Oil to the middle sight glass
Bit 1 = Unused
Bit 2 = Low Oil Injection Temp. Alarm
Bit 2 = Unused
Bit 3 = High Filter Differential Alarm
Bit 3 = Unused
Bit 4 = Low Suction Temp. Alarm
Bit 4 = Unused
Bit 5 = High Discharge Temp. Alarm
Bit 5 = Unused
Bit 6 = Low Suction Pressure Alarm
Bit 6 = Unused
Bit 7 = High Discharge Pressure Alarm
Bit 7 = Unused
Bit 8 = High Process Temp. Alarm
Bit 8 = Unused
Bit 9 = Low Process Temp. Alarm
Bit 9 = Unused
Bit 10 = Low Oil Separator Temp. Alarm
Bit 10 = Unused
Bit 11 = High Oil Injection Temp. Alarm
Bit 11 = Unused
Bit 12 = High Motor Current Alarm
Bit 12 = Unused
Bit 13 = Remote Comm Time-out
Bit 13 = Unused
Bit 14 = High Superheat Run Temp. Alarm
Bit 14 = Unused
Bit 15 = Low Run Pressure Ratio Alarm
Bit 15 = Unused
• Commands: Start Command – starts the compressor in the currently active control mode. If anti-recycle time
exists, this command will fail
• Compressor Scheduling: Enable/Disable – if a valid schedule has not been defined (on screen or through comm),
this command will fail
• Compressor Scheduling: Control Mode ENUM – 0 = Unscheduled
When enabling the schedule, allow for a timeout of at least 3 seconds for the schedule to be verified as valid.
1 = Suction Pressure SP1
2 = Suction Pressure SP2
3 = Process Temp. SP1
4 = Process Temp. SP2
5 = Discharge Pressure SP1
6 = Discharge Pressure SP2
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
B - 99
Appendix B • Vission 20/20 Application Procedures
If control mode being set isn’t active in configuration, command will result in error. This values are allowed to get
changed only when schedule is enabled
Compressor Scheduling: Hour INT – This values are allowed to get changed only when schedule is disabled
Compressor Scheduling: Minute INT – This values are allowed to get changed only when schedule is disabled
• Statuses: Trip Status Word(s) – currently only 39 trips, so only Trip Status Words 1, 2 and 3 are used, with each
position indicating an trip (MSB to LSB [Bit 15, Bit 14, Bit 13, ... Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1, Bit 0]):
Word 1
Word 2
Word 3
Bit 0 = High Level Input Inhibit
Bit 0 = High Discharge Temp. Trip Bit 0 = High Filter Differential
Inhibit
Bit 1 = Low Process Temp. Inhibit
Bit 1 = Low Suction Pressure Trip
Bit 1 = High Superheat Temp.
Inhibit
Bit 2 = High Discharge Pressure Inhibit
Bit 2 = High Discharge Pressure
Trip
Bit 2 = High Superheat Start
Temp. Trip
Bit 3 = High Discharge Temp. Inhibit
Bit 3 = Starter Shutdown Trip
Bit 3 = High Superheat Rise Temp.
Trip
Bit 4 = Low Oil Separator Start Temp. Inhibit Bit 4 = Low Process Temp. Trip
Bit 4 = High Superheat Run Temp.
Trip
Bit 5 = Low Suction Pressure Inhibit
Bit 5 = Low Oil Separator Temp.
Trip
Bit 5 = Low Run Pressure Ratio Trip
Bit 6 = Low Suction Temp. Inhibit
Bit 6 = High Oil Injection Temp.
Trip
Bit 6 = High Oil Separator Temp.
Trip
Bit 7 = High Oil Injection Temp. Inhibit
Bit 7 = High Motor Current Trip
Bit 7 = Unused
Bit 8 = Prelube Oil Pump Inhibit
Bit 8 = Capacity Position Trip
Bit 8 = Unused
Bit 9 = Compressor Interlock Inhibit
Bit 9 = Volume Position Trip
Bit 9 = Unused
Bit 10 = High Level Shutdown Trip
Bit 10 = False Start
Bit 10 = Unused
Bit 11 = Compressor Interlock Trip
Bit 11 = Emergency Shutdown
Activated
Bit 11 = Unused
Bit 12 = Low Oil Pressure Trip
Bit 12 = Oil Level #1 Inhibit
Bit 12 = Unused
Bit 13 = Low Oil Injection Temp. Trip
Bit 13 = Oil Level #1 Trip
Bit 13 = Unused
Bit 14 = High Filter Differential Trip
Bit 14 = Oil Level #2 Trip
Bit 14 = Unused
Bit 15 = Low Suction Temp. Trip
Bit 15 = Low Oil Level Trip After
Stop
Bit 15 = Unused
B - 100
Vission 20/20 • Operation and Service Manual •Vilter/Emerson • 35391SC 2.0
35391SC 2.01 (8/13) Emerson and Vilter are trademarks of Emerson Electric Co. or one of its affiliated companies. © 2012 Emerson Climate Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.